2007 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 44Airbag System ........................................ 74Restraint System Check ......................... 92

Features and Controls ................................ 95Keys ....................................................... 97Doors and Locks .................................. 107Windows ............................................... 114Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 116Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 120Mirrors .................................................. 140

OnStar® System ................................... 145Universal Home Remote System .......... 148Storage Areas ...................................... 159Sunroof ................................................ 162

Instrument Panel ....................................... 165Instrument Panel Overview ................... 168Climate Controls ................................... 189Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 200Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 219Audio System(s) ................................... 227

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 287Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 288Towing ................................................. 328

2007 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 339Service ................................................. 342Fuel ...................................................... 344Checking Things Under

the Hood ........................................... 350Bulb Replacement ................................ 390Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 395Tires ..................................................... 398Appearance Care .................................. 436Vehicle Identification ............................. 445Electrical System .................................. 446Capacities and Specifications ................ 455

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 457Maintenance Schedule .......................... 458

Customer Assistance Information ............. 477Customer Assistance and Information ..... 478Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 496

Index .......................................................... 499

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem,the MALIBU Emblem, and the names MALIBUand MALIBU MAXX are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864103 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Power Seat ................................................... 9Manual Lumbar ............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Passenger Folding Seatback (Maxx) ............ 14Power Lift Seat ........................................... 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Rear Seat Operation ................................... 17

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 43Safety Belt Extender ................................... 43

Child Restraints ............................................ 44Older Children ............................................. 44Infants and Young Children ......................... 47Child Restraint Systems .............................. 51Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 55Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 58Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 67Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 69Airbag System .............................................. 74

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 76When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 80What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 81How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 81What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ... 82Passenger Sensing System ......................... 84Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 90Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 91Restraint System Check ............................... 92

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 92Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 93

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Power Seat

If the vehicle has apower seat, the controlused to operate it islocated on the outboardside of the driver’s seat.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the handle islocated on the outboardside of the seat.

Move the handle up repeatedly to decreaselumbar support. Move the handle down repeatedlyto increase lumbar support.

9

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats.

The buttons are locatedon the outboard side ofthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s seats.

Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on.The seat will heat to the high setting. Theindicator light above the switch will be lit next tothe number 2.Press the top of the switch again to go to the lowheat setting. The indicator light will be lit nextto the number 1.Press the bottom of the switch to turn thefeature off.The heated seat feature will turn off when theignition is turned off.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

10

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. Thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position. Release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the restraint up toraise it. To lower thehead restraint, press thebutton, located on thetop of the seatback, andpush the restraint down.

The rear seat head restraints are also adjustable.

13

Passenger Folding Seatback (Maxx)Your vehicle may have a passenger foldingseatback. This feature allows for more cargo spaceor allows the seatback to be used as a temporarytable while the vehicle is stopped.

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 76 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 322.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

14

To fold the seatback forward, do the following:

1. Make sure the seatback is in the most uprightposition and locked by using the recliningseatback lever on the outboard side of the seat.See Reclining Seatbacks on page 10.

2. If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwithout a side impact airbag, press eitherlever located on the back of the seatback andfold the seatback forward.If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwith a side impact airbag, press the leverlocated on the back of the seatback onthe inboard side. Press the lever and fold theseatback forward.

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwithout a side impact airbag, press eitherlever located on the back of the seatback. Pullthe seatback up to lock it into place. Makesure the safety belt is not twisted or caught inthe seatback.If your vehicle has the passenger folding seatwith a side impact airbag, press the leverlocated on the back of the seatback onthe inboard side. Pull the seatback up to lockit into place. Make sure the safety belt isnot twisted or caught in the seatback.

Seat without Side Impact Airbag shown,Seat with Side Impact Airbag similar

15

{CAUTION:


2. Push and pull the seatback to make sure it islocked into place.

3. Use the reclining seatback lever to adjust theseatback to a comfortable position. SeeReclining Seatbacks on page 10.

Power Lift SeatYour vehicle may have this feature. First move theseat forward or rearward to where you want it.See Manual Seats on page 8.

The power lift seat switch is located on theoutboard side of the driver’s seat. To raise orlower the seat, press the top or bottom ofthe switch.

16

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

Folding the SeatbackYour vehicle has a split folding rear seatback.

To fold down the rear seatback on the sedan, dothe following:

1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of thehandles located on the upper part of thetrunk opening. The driver’s side handle willopen the larger side of the seatback. Thepassenger’s side handle will open the smallerside of the seatback.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Once a handle is pulled, the seatback can bepushed open through the trunk, or pulledopen from inside the vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback on the MAXX, dothe following:

1. Pull up on and hold the lever located on theside of either rear seat.

17

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Once a lever is pulled, the seatback can bepushed into the down position.

{CAUTION:


18

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

To return the seatback to the upright position,push the seatback up until you hear a click. Thenpull on the seatback to make sure it is secure.

Rear Sliding Seat (MAXX Only)If your vehicle is the MAXX model your rear seatwill slide forward or rearward to allow morecargo space in the rear.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat backand forth to be sure the seat is locked in place.

If your vehicle has the rear seat entertainmentsystem, slide the rear seat forward so that the frontedge of the seat cushion is lined up with themark on the carpet retainer trim on the floor of thedriver’s side rear seat. If the rear seat is forwardof the mark, you will not be able to open theDVD screen.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

20

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Lighton page 203.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

21

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

22

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

23

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

24

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

25

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 44 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 47. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

26

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 43.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 34.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

27

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

28

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

29


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

30


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pushdown the releasebutton (A) and move theheight adjuster to thedesired position.You can move theheight adjuster up bypushing the releasebutton up.

After you move the height adjuster to whereyou want it, try to move it without pushing therelease button to make sure it has lockedinto position.

34

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

35

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 43.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

37

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

38

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

Malibu SedanThere is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

39

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

40

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them between the seatback and theinterior body, leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

41

Malibu MAXXThere is a safety belt routing guide attached toeach outside passenger position in the rear seat ofthe Malibu MAXX. Here is how to use the safetybelt routing guide:

1. Slide the edge of the safety belt (D) throughthe opening at the top of the guide (B).

2. Adjust the safety belt so that it lies flat againstthe lower level (C) or the upper level (A) ofthe guide.Be sure the safety belt lies flat against theguide.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

3. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove the safety belt from the guide, slide theedge of the safety belt through the opening atthe top of the guide.

42

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 93.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

43

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

45

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

46

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

47

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

48

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

49

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

50

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

51

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

52

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

53

Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 58 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

54

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure the childis properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

55

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger seat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will not

CAUTION: (Continued)


deploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place the child restraint,you may not be able to access certain safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.

56

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint usingLATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Occupant prohibitedB. Child restraint

using LATCH

A. Child restraintusing LATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

C. Child restraint usingsafety belt or LATCHor occupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraintusing LATCH

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

57

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

58

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

59

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachrear anchor positionhas a label, nearthe crease between theseatback and theseat cushion.

For sedan models, each rear seating position hasexposed metal lower anchors in the creasebetween the seatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on theback of the rearseatback near the toptether anchors.

Rear Seat

MAXX Models

MAXX Models

60

For sedan models, the top tether anchors arelocated behind the rear seat on the filler panel.

For MAXX models, the top tether anchors arelocated on the back of the rear seatback. Be sureto use an anchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Sedan MAXX

61

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 55for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

62

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restrainton page 55. Depending on where you placethe child restraint, you may not be able to accesscertain safety belt assemblies or LATCHanchors for additional passengers or childrestraints.

You cannot secure three child restraints using theLATCH anchors in the rear seat at the sametime, but you can install two of them. If you wantto do this, install one LATCH child restraint inthe passenger-side position, and install the otherone either in the driver’s-side position or inthe center position. Refer to the followingillustration to learn which anchors to use.

63

A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsMake sure to attach the child restraint at theproper anchor location.

Sedan

MAXX

64

This system is designed to make installation ofchild restraints easier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Insteaduse the vehicle’s anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor tosecure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the position you are using has an

adjustable head restraint, raise it. SeeHead Restraints on page 13.

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

65

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether under the headrestraint and in betweenthe head restraintposts. See HeadRestraints on page 13.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether route thetether under the headrestraint and in betweenthe head restraintposts. See HeadRestraints on page 13.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

66

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 58.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

67

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

68

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 58.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 55.

In addition, your vehicle has the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 84 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 205 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

69

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbags deploy.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child



restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


70

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8 or Power Seat on page 9.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 58.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 58 if the childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 84. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag or airbags are off. Ifyour child restraint is forward-facing, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe child restraint in this seat. See ManualSeats on page 8 or Power Seat on page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side impact airbag (if equipped), theoff indicator in the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit when you turnthe ignition to ON or START. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 205.

71

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

72

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to ON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

73

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver andanother frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have a seat-mountedside impact airbag for the driver and for the rightfront passenger. Your vehicle may also haveroof-mounted side impact airbags. Roof-mountedside impact airbags are available for the driverand the passenger seated directly behindthe driver and for the right front passenger and thepassenger seated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the side of the frontseatback closest to the door. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt, even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.


74


Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly, whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

75

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 44 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 47.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 204 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

76

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver, it is in the side of the driver’sseatback closest to the door.

77

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger, it is in the sideof the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is in the ceiling above theside windows.

78

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie-downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating airbag willbe blocked. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.The path of an inflating airbag must bekept clear.

79

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level canvary, however, with specific vehicle design, so thatit can be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

80

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 74 for moreinformation. Side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Aside impact airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity ofthe impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts.

81

Airbags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. But the frontalairbags would not help you in many types ofcollisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, andmany side impacts, primarily because anoccupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. Sideimpact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal or nearfrontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag, the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest tothe door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), and the garnish trim and the areaalong the ceiling of your vehicle near the sidewindows for the roof–mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) — may be hot for a short time. Theparts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the vents inthe deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of the windshieldor being able to steer the vehicle, nor does itprevent people from leaving the vehicle.

82

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off again by using the controls for thosefeatures.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 490.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

83

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to ON or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Ifyou use remote start to start your vehicle from adistance, if your vehicle has this feature, youmay not see the system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol foroff will be visible. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 205.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

United States Canada

84

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


85

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator on the instrument panel will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 69.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

86

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

87

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 204 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,can affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the right frontpassenger’s seat.

88

You may want to consider not using seat coversor other aftermarket equipment if your vehiclehas the passenger sensing system. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 91 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how thesystem operates.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and theairbag readiness light on the instrument panel willbe lit. The system should resume normaloperation after the seat is allowed to dry. If thesystem operates incorrectly after the seathas dried, have your dealer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

89

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 497.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

90

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 478.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillargarnish trim, roof-mounted airbag modules, orairbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are in StepTwo of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 478.

91

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 440for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback (if equipped),or the side impact airbag covering on thegarnish trim and ceiling near the side windows(if equipped), the airbag may not workproperly. You may have to replace the airbagmodule in the steering wheel, both theairbag module and the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s airbag, the airbagmodule and seatback for the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s seat-mounted side impactairbags (if equipped), or the side impact airbagmodule, garnish trim and ceiling coveringfor the roof-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped). Do not open or break the airbagcoverings.

92

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash, thespecial part of the safety belt that goes throughthe seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part about the airbagsystem earlier in this manual.

93

If the frontal airbags inflate you will need toreplace the driver’s and right front passengerssafety belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so.Then the new retractor assembly will be thereto help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners.

Have your safety belt pretensioners checked ifyour vehicle has been in a collision, or if yourairbag readiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 204.

94

Keys .............................................................. 97Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 99Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ............................................... 100Doors and Locks ........................................ 107

Door Locks ................................................ 107Power Door Locks ..................................... 108Door Ajar Reminder .................................. 108Delayed Locking ........................................ 108Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 110Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 110Lockout Protection ..................................... 111Trunk (Sedan) ........................................... 112Liftgate (MAXX) ......................................... 113

Windows ...................................................... 114Power Windows ........................................ 115Sun Visors ................................................ 115

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 116Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 116PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 118PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 119

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 120New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 120Ignition Positions ....................................... 121Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 122Starting the Engine .................................... 123Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 124Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 125Automatic Transaxle Operation

(Base Models) ........................................ 127Automatic Transaxle Operation

(SS Models) ........................................... 130Parking Brake ........................................... 134Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 135Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 136Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 137Engine Exhaust ......................................... 138Running the Engine While Parked ............. 139

Mirrors ......................................................... 140Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 140Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® .......... 140

Section 2 Features and Controls

95

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and Compass ................... 140

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass ........................................ 142

Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 144Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................... 144Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 144

OnStar® System .......................................... 145Universal Home Remote System ................ 148

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 148

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 149

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 150

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 156

Storage Areas ............................................. 159Glove Box ................................................. 159Cupholder(s) .............................................. 160Center Console Storage Area .................... 160Map Pocket ............................................... 160Rear Compartment Storage

Panel/Cover (MAXX) .............................. 160Table (MAXX) ........................................... 162Convenience Net ....................................... 162

Sunroof ....................................................... 162

Section 2 Features and Controls

96

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

97

One key is used for theignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the key has abar-coded key tag. This tag may be removedby your dealer before it is delivered.

Each tag has a key code on it that tells yourdealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extrakeys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If you loseyour keys, you’ll be able to have one made easilyusing this tag. If you need a new key, go toyour dealer for the correct key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 484 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

98

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

99

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors may be locked and unlocked,and the trunk or liftgate may be opened fromabout 3 feet (1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) away withthe remote keyless entry transmitter. If yourvehicle has the remote vehicle start feature, youcan also start the vehicle’s engine with the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” later inthis section for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps will turn off after all of thedoors are closed. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the remote lock feedbackcan be programmed to have the horn chirpand/or the parking lamps flash when the remotekeyless entry transmitter is used to lock thevehicle’s doors. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHTFLASH” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 225 for more information.

Pressing the lock button may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 116.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

100

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors, and theliftgate will unlock. The interior lamps will turnon and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignitionis turned on. If enabled through the DIC, theremote unlock feedback can be programmed tohave the horn chirp and/or the parking lamps flashwhen the remote keyless entry transmitter isused to unlock the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCKHORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 225 for more information.

If enabled through the DIC, and it is darkenough outside, the vehicle’s high-beamheadlamps, parking lamps, and back-up lamps willturn on each time the unlock button on thetransmitter is pressed. These exterior lamps willstay on for 20 seconds, or until a door is opened.See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 225.

Pressing the unlock button will disarm the contenttheft-deterrent system, if equipped. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 116.

V (Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release): Thetrunk or liftgate will open when this button onthe transmitter is pressed and held for aboutone second. You can open the sedan trunk orthe liftgate on the MAXX when the vehicleis in PARK (P) or when the ignition is off.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): This buttonmay be used to locate your vehicle. Press andrelease this button to initiate vehicle locate. Thehorn will sound three times and the headlampsand parking lamps will flash three times. Pressand hold the button for about three seconds toinitiate the panic alarm. The horn will sound andthe headlamps and parking lamps will flash for30 seconds. Press the button again to cancel thepanic alarm.

101

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourGM dealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.Each vehicle can have a maximum offour transmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutfour years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in thevehicle’s DIC will display if the remote keylessentry transmitter battery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

102

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into thenotch located below the vehicle locator/panicalarm button, and separate the bottomhalf from the top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive (+) side ofthe battery faces up. Use one three-volt,CR2032, or equivalent type battery.

3. Put the two halves back together. Make surethe cover is on tight, so water will not getinside the transmitter.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

103

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote start feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. It may also start thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems andrear window defogger. When the remote startsystem is active and the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, it may automaticallyregulate the inside temperature. Normal operationof the system will return after the key is turnedto ON. See Automatic Climate Control System onpage 193 for additional information.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts, each with 10 minutes of engine running time.

The remote vehicle start feature needs to be resetafter your vehicle’s engine is started two timesusing the transmitter’s remote start button.The remote start system is reset by inserting thevehicle’s key into the ignition switch and turning itto ON. See Ignition Positions on page 121 forinformation regarding the ignition positions onyour vehicle.

You can start your vehicle’s engine from about197 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may beless while the vehicle is running, and as a resultyou may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which may affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 99.

104

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the keyless entry transmitter willhave a button with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lights flash.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the engineis running.The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone, or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to ON.If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is still running, insert thekey into the ignition switch and turn it to ON todrive the vehicle.

4. To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following. The parking lamps will turn off.

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitterat the vehicle, and press the remotestart button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch to ON and thento OFF.

If only one remote start procedure has been done,since last driving the vehicle or resetting theremote start system, the engine may be startedagain remotely by following the remote startprocedure a second time.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

105

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifany of the following occur:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 212.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system may beenabled or disabled through the DIC. See“REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 225 for additionalinformation.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it will have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+)symbol on the back cover, your vehicle has theremote start ready feature. You can lock or unlockyour vehicle from about 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

106

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or remote keylessentry transmitter, if equipped. Turn the keycounterclockwise to unlock the door.

From the inside, lock and unlock the door bymoving the manual lock knob down and up, or byusing the power door lock switches.

107

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s door.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors andliftgate, if equipped. Press the bottom of theswitch to lock all doors and liftgate, if equipped.

The rear doors do not have power door lockswitches. Rear seat passengers must usethe manual lock knob on their doors.

Door Ajar ReminderIf one of the doors is not fully closed while theignition is on and the shift lever is moved out ofPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:

• A chime will sound.

• The DOOR AJAR message will displaythrough the Driver Information Center (DIC)until the door is closed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 222.

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the driver to delay the lockingof the vehicle. It will not operate with the keyin the ignition. See Lockout Protection onpage 111.

108

Press the driver’s power door lock switch or theremote keyless entry transmitter lock button once.With the key removed from the ignition and thedriver’s door open, the following will occur:

• Three chimes will sound to signal the delay.

• All doors will lock and the turn signals will flashonce five seconds after the last door has beenclosed.

• The horn will chirp if the horn chirp feature isenabled. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 225.

If a door is opened before the five seconds haselapsed, the doors will not lock until five secondsafter all doors are closed.

If the power door lock switch or the transmitterlock button is pressed twice when leavingthe vehicle, the doors will lock immediately.

If the power door unlock switch or the transmitterunlock button is pressed, the doors will unlockimmediately and not lock automatically afterthe doors are closed.

This feature is turned on at the factory but maybe turned off through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

109

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock alldoors automatically when the following are met:

• all doors are closed

• the ignition is on

• the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).

This feature cannot be disabled.

When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P),all doors will unlock.

If someone needs to exit the vehicle once thedoors are locked, have that person use the manuallock knob or power door unlock switch.

The power door lock and unlock functions can beprogrammed through prompts displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC). These promptsallow you to choose various lock and unlocksettings. See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 225.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label showinglock and unlockpositions is locatednear the lock.

Security Lock Labelshown

110

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, dothe following:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature prevents the driver’s door from beinglocked using the power door locks, if the key isleft in the ignition and a door is open.

Pressing the power door lock switch will lock allthe doors and then unlock the driver’s door.

Pressing and holding the power door lock switchfor more than three seconds will override thisfeature.

If you remove the key from the ignition, or if youuse the manual door lock or the remote keylessentry transmitter, you could still lock your keyinside your vehicle. Always remember to take yourkey with you.

111

Trunk (Sedan)To unlock the trunk from the outside, use the keyor the remote keyless entry transmitter. Whenclosing the trunk, close from the center to ensureit fully latches.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.



• Turn the fan on your heating orcooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 138.

Remote Trunk/Liftgate Release

Press the remoterelease button, locatedon the lower edgeof the driver’s door,to open the trunk lidor the liftgate.

112

You can open the trunk lid on the sedan or theliftgate on the MAXX only while the vehicleis in PARK (P) or the ignition is off.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk of the sedanmodel on the trunk latch. This handle will glowfollowing exposure to light. Pull the release handleup to open the trunk from the inside.

Liftgate (MAXX)To open the liftgate, press the trunk/liftgate buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter or theremote trunk/liftgate release button located on thelower edge of the driver’s door. See “RemoteTrunk/Liftgate Release” under Trunk (Sedan) onpage 112.

If the liftgate is unlocked, you can manually openit by pressing the touchpad switch located onthe underside of the liftgate trim panel, slightly tothe right of center.

113

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

114

Power Windows

The power windowswitches are located onthe armrest on thedriver’s door. Inaddition, eachpassenger doorhas a switch forits own window.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window also has an express-downfeature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Pressthe front of the switch part way, and the driver’swindow will open a small amount. If the front of theswitch is pressed all the way down and released,the window will go all the way down automatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch momentarily. To raise thewindow, pull and hold the front of the switch.

Window LockoutThe driver’s power window controls also include alockout button.

o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout buttonto stop the rear passengers from using theirwindow switches. The driver and front passengercan still operate all the windows with the lockon. When the red part of the switch is visible youhave returned to normal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down thevisors. You can also remove them from the centermount and swing them to the side, to block outglare from the side. The visors also haveextenders that can be pulled out.

Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrorslocated on the passenger and driver’s sidevisor. When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.

115

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may havea content theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the system bydoing any one of the following:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterlock button.

• Press the power door lock switch while thedriver’s door is open.

The system will arm either:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors and theliftgate (MAXX) are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter a second time while all thedoors and liftgate are closed, the system willarm immediately. The system will still arm insixty seconds if a door or liftgate is open. Whenthe opened door or liftgate is closed, it willalso become armed.

The security light, located on the instrument panelcluster, will turn on to indicate that arming hasbeen initiated. Once the system is armed,the security light will flash once everythree seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door or the liftgate is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, you may lockthe car with the lock knob on the doors.

116

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:

• Press the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button.

• Turn the ignition on.

• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylindercounterclockwise.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activatedby either:

• Opening the driver’s door or liftgate(MAXX model). This will cause a ten secondpre-alarm chirp followed by a thirty second fullalarm of horn and lights.

• Opening any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will thenre-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter. This will alsodisarm the system.

• Insert the key in the driver’s door key lockcylinder and turn it counterclockwise. Thiswill also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press the unlockor lock buttons on the remote keyless entrytransmitter, it means that the content theft securitysystem alarm was triggered previously.

117

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.





PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

118

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III +(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III + is apassive theft-deterrent system. This means youdon’t have to do anything special to arm or disarmthe system. It works when you insert or removethe key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III + system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it shuts down thevehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starterwill not work and fuel will stop flowing to theengine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method tostart the vehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light comes on, thekey may have a damaged transponder. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses on page 447. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, your vehicleneeds service. If your vehicle does start, the firstkey may be faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key® III + to have a new keymade. In an emergency, contact ChevroletRoadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 484 for more information.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III + decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III + tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your GM dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III + to get a new key blankthat is cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

119

To program the new key do the following:1. Verify that the new key has “+” stamped on it.2. Insert the already programmed key in the

ignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key tooff, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn itto on within five seconds of removing theoriginal key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed. It may not beapparent that the security light went on due tohow quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III +system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle isnot protected by the PASS-Key® III + systemat this time.If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III + key,see your GM dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III + to have a new key made.

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Donot make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 331 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

120

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition switch, you canturn it to four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

9 (OFF): This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. It also locks your ignitionand transaxle. A warning chime will sound ifyou open the driver’s door while the ignition is offand the key is left in the ignition.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and windshield wiperswhile the engine is not running.

Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed ortowed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 328.

R (ON): This position unlocks the ignition. Itis also the position to where the key returns afteryou start the engine and release the switch.The switch will stay in this position while theengine is running. But even while the engine isnot running, you can use ON to operate yourelectrical accessories, and to display someinstrument panel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or On position with the engine off.You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to the ONposition for normal driving.

121

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow the radioand power windows, and if your vehicle has heatedseats and sunroof, to continue to work up to10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF.

The power windows, heated seats and sunroof willwork until any door is opened.

The radio will continue to work until the driver’sdoor is opened.

All these features will work when the ignition keyis in the ON or ACC (Accessory) positions.

122

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

123

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move rearwardfor better pedal reach.

The ignition must be off or the vehicle in PARK(P) for this feature to work. The feature willnot work if your foot is pushing on the throttle orbrake pedal. Remove your foot from the pedalsand press the switch again.

The switch used toadjust the pedals islocated on the left side ofthe instrument panel.

124

To use your adjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, do the following:

The adjustable pedal feature is meant to be usedwith the adjustable seat and adjustable steeringwheel controls to reach a safe and comfortableposition.

1. Adjust your seat to a comfortable positionwhere you can comfortably reach othercontrols such as the radio and climate controls.

2. Adjust the throttle and brake pedals to reacha comfortable and safe operating position.

3. Adjust the steering wheel to a safe operatingposition.

Engine Coolant HeaterIn very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater, if your vehicle has thisfeature, can help. You will get easier starting andlower fuel usage during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

125

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.On the 2.2L engine, the engine coolant heatercord is located near the air cleaner box on thepassenger’s side of the engine compartment.On the 3.5L and 3.9L V6 engines, the enginecoolant heater cord is located on the driver’sside around the battery box. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 352 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

126

Automatic Transaxle Operation(Base Models)

Your automatic transaxlehas a shift lever locatedon the console betweenthe seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 135. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 331.

127

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Youmust fully apply your regular brake first andthen press the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON.If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever, then push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 136.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

128

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in LOW (L2) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higherspeeds until then.

LOW (L): This position gives you access toFOURTH, THIRD, SECOND and FIRST gearranges. This provides more engine brakingbut lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deep snow ormud. If the electronic range select is put in LOW(L), the transaxle will not shift into lower gears untilthe vehicle is going slow enough.

Electronic Range Select Mode

This feature allows youto limit higher gears byselecting a maximumgear range when theshift lever is in LOW (L).The button for this modeis located on the left ofthe shift lever knob.

When the shift lever is first moved into LOW (L),the display in the instrument panel shows L3.Press the minus (−) end of the button on the shiftlever once for L2 and once more for L1. Pressthe plus (+) end of the button once each to returnto L2, L3 and L4. The shift lever must be movedback to DRIVE (D) to turn off the electronic rangeselect mode.

129

L4 (LOW 4): This position does not limit gears,but provides more engine braking, and lowerfuel economy, than DRIVE (D). The actual gear isdetermined by throttle and vehicle speed.

L3 (LOW 3/DRIVE 3): This position preventsfourth gear operation. Actual gear is determinedby throttle and vehicle speed.

L2 (LOW 2/DRIVE 2): This position prevents thirdand fourth gear operation. Actual gear isdetermined by throttle and vehicle speed. If youshift from L3 to L2 at vehicle speeds exceeding80 mph (110 km/h), the transaxle will not shift intoL2 gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.

L1 (LOW 1/DRIVE 1): This position prevents L2,L3, and L4 gear operation. If you shift from L2to the L1 position at vehicle speeds exceeding40 mph (65 km/h), the transaxle will not shift intoL1 gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.

Automatic Transaxle Operation(SS Models)

Your automatic transaxlehas a shift lever locatedon the console betweenthe seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

130

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 135.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 331.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You must fullyapply your regular brake first and press the shiftlever button before you can shift from PARK (P)while the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift leverand push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)as you maintain brake application. Then move theshift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out ofPark (P) on page 136.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320.

131

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

MANUAL MODE (M): This position, allows youto change gears similar to a manual transaxle.If your vehicle has this feature, see DriverShift Control (DSC).

Driver Shift Control (DSC)This feature allows you to select lower or higherdriving gears when the shift lever is in MANUALMODE (M). The button for this mode is located onthe left side of the shift lever knob.

132

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) rearwardinto the MANUAL MODE (M). The vehicle willbe in the MANUAL MODE (M) and a gearbased on the current driving speed.While driving in MANUAL MODE (M), thetransaxle will remain in the selected drivegear unless:

• A shift is required to protect the engine ortransaxle or,

• The vehicle slows almost to a stop(the vehicle will automatically downshift)

2. Press the plus (+) button to upshift or theminus (-) button to downshift.

When the shift lever is first moved into MANUALMODE (M), the display on the instrument panelcluster shows M1, M2, M3, M4. Position M for themanual mode and a number representing thegear the transaxle is in. Press the minus (−) endof the button on the shift lever to downshift.Press the plus (+) end of the button to upshift.The shift lever must be moved back to DRIVE (D)to turn off the manual mode and return to fullyautomatic shifting.

While using the Driver Shift Control (DSC) featurethe vehicle will have firmer shifting and increasedperformance. You can use this for sport drivingor when climbing hills to stay in gear longer or todownshift for more power or engine braking.

The transaxle will only allow you to shift into gearsappropriate for the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM). The transaxle willnot automatically shift to the next higher gear if theengine RPM is too high.

When coming to a stop in the manual mode, thevehicle will automatically downshift to the propergear based on speed. Upon acceleration you willneed to manually upshift to the desired gear.

Second Gear Start FeatureWhen accelerating your vehicle from a stop insnowy and icy conditions, you may want to shiftthe gear select tap switch into Second gear.A higher gear allows you to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

133

With the DSC feature, the vehicle can be set topull away in Second gear.

1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) into theMANUAL MODE (M).

2. With the vehicle stopped, press (+) end of thebutton to select Second gear. The vehicle willstart from a stop position in Second gear.

3. Once moving select the desired drive gear.

Parking Brake

To set the parkingbrake, push down theparking brake pedal withyour left foot. If theignition is on, the brakesystem warning lightwill come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 207.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot until you feel the pedal release. If theparking brake is not released when you begin todrive, the brake system warning light will beon and a chime will sound warning you that theparking brake is still on.

The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will alsoappear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) toremind you to release the parking brake. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 222.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 331.

134

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 331.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe shift lever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the button.If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked in PARK (P).

135

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 135.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, then you will be able to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to apply your regularbrake first and then press the shift leverbutton before you can shift from PARK (P). SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation (Base Models) onpage 127 or Automatic Transaxle Operation(SS Models) on page 130.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into the gear you wish.

136

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

137

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

138

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 138.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 316.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 135.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 331.

139

MirrorsManual Rearview MirrorThis mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, toadjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror to aposition that allows you to see out of the backwindow. To adjust the height of the mirror, adjustthe arm that connects the mirror to the windshield.

To reduce glare from lights behind you, move thelever toward you to the night position.

Manual Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

If your vehicle has this feature, this mirror has aknob located at the bottom of the mirror. It is usedto change the mirror from day to night position.To reduce glare from headlamps behind you whiledriving at night, rotate the knob clockwise. Fordaytime driving, turn the knob counterclockwise.

There are also three OnStar® buttons locatedat the bottom of the mirror face. See your dealerfor more information on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System onpage 145 for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and OnStar®

controls. For more information about OnStar®, seeOnStar® System on page 145.The automatic dimming feature turns on each timethe vehicle is started. To turn automatic dimmingoff or on, press the left button below the mirror.A green indicator light will be on when automaticdimming is on.There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 145 formore information about the service OnStar®

provides.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

140

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C appearsin the compass window, the compass may need tobe reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:1. Find your current location and variance

zone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

141

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass. This featureenables the mirror to sense nighttime glare fromvehicle headlamps from behind and automaticallydim to reduce the glare to a safe level. Theautomatic dimming feature turns on each time thevehicle is started.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for theautomatic dimming feature.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to

the left of the on/off button, is on. If it’s not,press the on/off button until the greenlight comes on, indicating that the mirror is inautomatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing the on/off button until the greenindicator light turns off.

Compass OperationY: This is the on/off button for thecompass feature.Press this button once to turn the compass onor off.When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C or CALappears in the compass window, the compass mayneed to be reset or calibrated.To calibrate the compass, do the following:• Make sure CAL is displayed in the display.

If CAL is not displayed, press and hold thecompass button until CAL is displayed.

• Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h)or less until the display reads a direction.

142

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the compass button until aZ and a zone number appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the compass button quickly untilyou reach the correct zone number. If C orCAL appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

143

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Use the selector switch located below the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or rightoutside mirror. Then press any of the four arrowslocated on the control pad to move each mirrorin the desired direction.

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side ofyour vehicle and the area beside and behindyour vehicle.

Outside Power Heated MirrorsIf the vehicle has this feature, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, the heated driver’sand passenger’s outside power mirrors arewarmed to help clear them of ice, snow andcondensation. See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control System on page 189 for moreinformation. Also see Outside Power Mirrorson page 144 for mirror operation.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away than theyreally are. If you cut too sharply into theright lane, you could hit a vehicle on yourright. Check your inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changing lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things,like other vehicles, look farther away than theyreally are.

144

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and

Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond thefirst year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlockor Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not beavailable until you register with OnStar®.

145

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

146

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Three Spoke) on page 281 or Audio SteeringWheel Controls (Four Spoke) on page 282for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we can provideyou with location-based services.

147

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.

148




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.

149




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below.If there is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

150

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

151

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

Example of Switch Settings

152

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Example

153

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owner’s guide for your garage door opener.

154

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for about 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly above thebuttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 482.

155

Universal HomeRemote System Operation(With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 482.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

156

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote button andthe hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at firstand then rapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receives the frequencysignal from the hand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for twoseconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

157

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds,then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1, as this will erase allprevious programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

158

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding theUniversal Home Remote button, proceedwith Step 2 under “Programming UniversalHome Remote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 482.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open, pull the handle down and pull the glovebox door down until it stops and is fully open.

159

Cupholder(s)There is a cupholder next to the shift lever andanother, if equipped, at the rear of the shift lever.

If your vehicle has rear seat cupholders, pulldown the door on the back of the center consoleto access them.

Center Console Storage AreaThere is a storage compartment in the centerconsole area. To open the lower compartment, pullup on the release at the front edge of thearmrest. Your vehicle may have an accessorypower outlet inside of the storage area. SeeAccessory Power Outlet(s) on page 187 formore information.

Map PocketYour vehicle may have storage pockets located onthe door panels or the back of the front seats.

Rear Compartment StoragePanel/Cover (MAXX)Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargocover feature. The panel/cargo cover can beadjusted into three positions.

160

To use the panel in the lower position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thelower guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel.

The panel can be used in this position if you needadditional space above the panel. Place thecargo on top of the panel in this position.

{CAUTION:

If you were to carry things on theadjustable panel when it is in the upper(cargo cover) or center positions, during asudden vehicle movement or a crash,those things could be thrown around inthe vehicle. You or others could beinjured. When it is in the upper or centerposition, always secure any cargo on thefloor beneath the panel/cover.

To use the panel in the center position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into themiddle guides.



To use the panel in the upper position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into theupper guides.



This can be used as a cargo cover for the reararea. The panel may be installed either carpet orplastic side up. The panel may also be usedas a table in this position. See “Table” followingfor more information.

161

Table (MAXX)Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel thatalso functions as a table. The maximum loadfor the table is 100 lbs distributed (45 kg).

To set up the table, do the following:

1. Place the front corners into the rear upperguides.

2. Unlatch the fastener to release the leg fromthe plastic side of the table and turn the legoutward.

3. Set the table leg securely onto the liftgate lockstriker at the rear edge of the vehicle.

Notice: Driving with the panel extended intothe table position could damage your vehicle.Always have the panel in the stored positionwhile you are driving.

Notice: Placing hot items on the surface ofthe table could damage it. Always be sure thatthe items that are placed on the surface ofthe table are of moderate temperature.

Hooks are located on the table to hang items.

Convenience NetYou may have a convenience net in the rear ofyour vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocerybags, in place during sharp turns or quick stopsand starts.

The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flatwhen you are not using it.

Sunroof

If the vehicle has asunroof, the switch tooperate it is locatedon the overheadconsole between thesun visors.

162

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition isin ACC or ON, or while retained accessorypower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 122 for more information.

The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or itcan be express-opened all of the way.

To open the sunroof to the vent position, push therear of the switch and release it. Push andrelease the rear of the switch again to fully openthe sunroof.

The vent and open positions can be adjusted fordriving comfort by pushing and holding the front ofthe switch until the sunroof moves to the desiredposition.

A deflector will automatically pop up when thesunroof is opened. The deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

To close the sunroof, push the front of the switchand hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroofwill stop if the switch is released during operation.Remember to close the sunshade by hand.

The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward ofthe sliding glass panel, damage will occurand the sunroof may not open or closeproperly. Always close the glass panel beforeclosing the sunshade.

163

✍ NOTES

164

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 168Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 170Other Warning Devices ............................. 170Horn .......................................................... 170Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ............ 170Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 171Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 172Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 172Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 173Windshield Wipers ..................................... 173Windshield Washer .................................... 174Rear Window Wiper/Washer

(MAXX Model) ....................................... 175Cruise Control ........................................... 176Exterior Lamps .......................................... 179Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 182Headlamps Off in PARK (P) ...................... 182Delayed Headlamps .................................. 182Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 183Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 184Fog Lamps ................................................ 185Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 185

Dome Lamp .............................................. 185Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 186Parade Dimming ........................................ 186Front Reading Lamps ................................ 186Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 186Trunk Lamp ............................................... 186Cargo Lamp .............................................. 186Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 187Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 187Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 188

Climate Controls ......................................... 189Climate Control System ............................. 189Automatic Climate Control System ............. 193Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 199

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 200Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 200Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 202Trip Odometer ........................................... 202Tachometer ............................................... 202Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 203Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 203

Section 3 Instrument Panel

165

Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 204Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 205Charging System Light .............................. 207Brake System Warning Light ..................... 207Anti-Lock Brake System

Warning Light ........................................ 208Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 209Traction Control System

Active Light ............................................ 210Enhanced Traction System

Warning Light ........................................ 210Enhanced Traction System

Active Light ............................................ 211Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 211Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 212Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 212Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 216Security Light ............................................ 217Cruise Control Light .................................. 217Highbeam On Light ................................... 217Fuel Gage ................................................. 218

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 219DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 219DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 222DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 225

Audio System(s) ......................................... 227Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) .............................. 228Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) .............................. 229Radio with CD (Base Level) ...................... 229Radio with CD (Uplevel) ............................ 235Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 244XM Radio Messages ................................. 258Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 260Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Without Entertainment System) ............. 277Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(With Entertainment System) .................. 279Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 281Audio Steering Wheel Controls

(Three Spoke) ........................................ 281


166

Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Four Spoke) .......................................... 282

Radio Reception ........................................ 283Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 284

Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 284Fixed Mast Antenna (MAXX Only) ............. 284Backglass Antenna (Sedan Only) .............. 285XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 285


167

Instrument Panel Overview

168

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate ControlSystem on page 189.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 171.

C. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See CruiseControl on page 176.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 200.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 173.

F. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 121.

G. Hazard Warning Flasher. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 170.

H. Passenger Sensing System. See PassengerSensing System on page 84.

I. Center Air Outlets. See Climate Control Systemon page 189.

J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 227.

K. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem on page 189.

L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 159.

M. Side Air Outlets. See Climate Control Systemon page 189.

N. Adjustable Pedal Buttons (If Equipped).See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal onpage 124.

O. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 185.

P. Storage Compartment.Q. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps on

page 185.R. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 350.S. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on

page 134.T. Horn. See Horn on page 170.U. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls (ThreeSpoke) on page 281 or Audio Steering WheelControls (Four Spoke) on page 282.

V. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 187.

W. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 135.

169

X. Center Console Storage Compartment. SeeCenter Console Storage Area on page 160.

Y. Traction Control Button or Enhanced TractionSystem Button (If Equipped). See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 296 EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 297.

Z. Rear Wiper/Washer Controls (If Equipped).See Windshield Washer on page 174.

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem. Yourfront and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not inthe ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering WheelA tilt and telescope wheel allows you to adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. You can raise thesteering wheel to the highest level to give your legsmore room when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

170

To tilt and telescope the wheel, pull down thelever. Then move the wheel to a comfortableposition, pull up the lever to lock the wheelin place. The wheel can be adjusted up anddown as well as forward and backward.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 172.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 172.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 173.

• P Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lampson page 179.

171

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown to the latched position. When the turn isfinished, the lever will return automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it.

A warning chime signal will come on if you have leftyour turn signal on for more than 2/3 mile (1 km).

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses on page 447.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunctionlever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, a light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is in ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

172

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps momentarily to signal a driver infront of you that you want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlamps comeon, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If the wiper blades are frozen tothe windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new bladesor blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 395.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it coolsdown. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload. If the wipers gets stuck, turn the wipersoff, clear away the snow or ice, and then turn thewipers back on.

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at high speed.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at low speed.

& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to seta delay between wipes.

173

6 (Delay/Intermittent Speed Sensitive):When the lever is in the delay position, move theintermittent adjust band to set for shorter or longerdelay cycles. To the left of the adjust band are barsthat indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smallerbars mean the wiper movement is less frequent.Larger bars mean the wiper movement is morefrequent.

During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycletime is sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehiclespeed increases your delay cycle time will decreaseand wiper movement will occur more frequently.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way downto mist and release for a single wiping cycle. Thewindshield wipers will stop after one wipe and thelever will return to its original position. If additionalwipes are needed, hold the band on mist longer.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on formore than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampswill turn on automatically. They will turn off15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, push in the button at theend of the stalk until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washers willstop, but the wipers will continue to wipe for aboutthree cycles and will either stop or will resumethe speed you were using before.

174

Rear Window Wiper/Washer(MAXX Model)

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

If your vehicle has a rearwindow wiper, the switchis located on the centerconsole. See InstrumentPanel Overview onpage 168.

Press the top of the switch to put the wiper incontinuous operation mode. Press the bottom ofthe switch to put the wiper system in delay mode.Press the center of the switch to wash and wipe therear window. Washer fluid will spray up the glass aslong as the switch is pushed. When the switch isreleased, the wipers will continue to cycle aboutthree times. To turn either of the wiper settings off,press the opposite side of the switch. Pressing thebutton all the way down to either side turns on awiper setting.

There is one shared washer fluid reservoir for thefront and rear windshield wipers. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

175

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. This can really help onlong trips. Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons are located on left sideof the steering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

RES+ (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume to apreviously set speed.

4–Spoke Steering WheelCruise Controls

3–Spoke Steering WheelCruise Controls

176

SET– (Set/Coast): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the set speed.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancelcruise control.

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the button with the cruise controlsymbol on it.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET– button located on the steeringwheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

177

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the RES+ button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to your chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+ symbol. Hold itthere until you get up to the speed you want,and then release the button.

• To increase your speed in very small amounts,press the RES+ symbol briefly and then releaseit. Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the set button on the steeringwheel until you reach the lower speed youwant, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, press theset button on the steering wheel briefly. Eachtime you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehiclewill slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.

178

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you may have tobrake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speeddown. Of course, applying the brake takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this to be toomuch trouble and do not use cruise control onsteep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to disengage the cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruisecontrol disengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster will go out.

• Press the on/off button, this will turn off thecruise control system.

• Press the cancel button. When cruise controldisengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster will go out.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

179

The exterior lamp switch has the followingfour positions:

2 (Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System):This position automatically turns on the DaytimeRunning Lamps during daytime, and theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.

P (Off/On): This position is the momentaryOff/On switch for the Automatic Headlamp System.In Canada, this only works when the vehicle isin PARK (P).

When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of theswitch to off/on will turn off the Automatic HeadlampSystem. Turn the switch to off/on again will turnthe Automatic Headlamp System back on. TheAutomatic Headlamp System is always turnedon at the beginning of an ignition cycle.

The following charts show the condition of thevehicle’s exterior lamps when the transaxle is not inPARK (P) and the switch is moved to each position:

United States Exterior Lamp Positions for Daytime

Lamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF DRL Mode OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON

Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON

180

United States Exterior Lamp Positions for Nighttime

Lamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp OFF ON OFF ON

Parking Lamp OFF ON ON ON

Taillamp OFF ON ON ON

Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for Daytime

Lamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp DRL Mode DRL Mode DRL Mode ON

Parking Lamp OFF OFF ON ON

Taillamp OFF OFF ON ON

Canadian Exterior Lamp Positions for Nighttime

Lamps P AUTO ; 2

Headlamp ON ON ON ON

Parking Lamp ON ON ON ON

Taillamp ON ON ON ON

181

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door and turn off theignition while leaving the lamps on, you willhear a warning chime.

Headlamps Off in PARK (P)This feature works when the ignition is ON and it isdark outside. To turn the headlamps off when it isdark outside but keep other exterior lights on, turnthe exterior lamp control to the parking lampposition. In this position, the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license plate lampsand instrument panel lights will be on, but theheadlamps will be off.

To turn on the headlamps along with the otherlamps when it is dark outside, turn the exteriorlamp control to the AUTO or headlamp position.

This feature will not work for Canadian vehicles.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature will continue toilluminate the headlamps for 20 seconds after thekey is turned to off at night. Then the headlampswill automatically turn off.

To override the 20 second delayed headlampfeature while it is active turn the switch at the endof the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off/onposition.

182

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will turn your low-beamheadlamps on at a reduced brightness whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO. Inaddition, Canadian vehicles DRL will also turnon if you have turned on the parking lamps.

• The light sensor detects daytime light. See theend of this section for more information on thelight sensor.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lightswill not be illuminated.

The DRL system will be off any time your vehicle isin PARK (P). The DRL system on U.S. vehicles canalso be turned off by using the off/on switch for oneignition cycle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Light SensorYour vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not covered or theheadlamps may remain on when you do not needthem. The light sensor for the DRL and AutomaticHeadlamp features is located on top of theinstrument panel.

The automatic headlamp system may be on whendriving through a parking garage, heavy outcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

183

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, your automaticheadlamp system will turn on your headlamps atthe normal brightness along with other lamps suchas the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and theinstrument panel lights. The radio lights will alsobe dim.

Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on topof the instrument panel, make sure it is not coveredor the automatic headlamp system will be on whenit is not needed.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DRL and theautomatic headlamp systems so that driving underbridges or bright overhead street lights does notaffect the system. The DRL and automaticheadlamp systems will only be affected when thelight sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longerthan this delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it will takeabout one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside. Duringthat delay, your instrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure your instrument panelbrightness control is in the full bright position. See“Instrument Panel Brightness Control” underInstrument Panel Brightness on page 185.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the ignition on and set theexterior light switch to the off/on position. ForCanadian vehicles, the transaxle must stayin PARK (P) for this function.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamps when you need them.

184

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the button forthe fog lamps is locatedon the instrumentpanel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

If your vehicle has fog lamps, the ignition mustbe on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light in the button will glow when the foglamps are on. Push the button again to turn the foglamps off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for thisfeature is located on theinstrument panel to theleft of the steering wheel.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.

Dome LampThe switch on this lamp has three positions. The onposition will turn on the lamp anytime. The doorposition will turn on the lamp whenever a door isopened. The off position will shut off the lampcompletely, even while a door is opened. Yourdome lamp may be equipped with two rear readinglamps. See Rear Reading Lamps on page 186.

185

Entry/Exit LightingWhen you open any door, the lamps inside of yourvehicle will go on. These lamps will fade out20 seconds after the last door is closed, or whenthe ignition is turned on after all doors havebeen closed. These lamps will also go on whenyou press the trunk release button, the unlockbutton or the panic button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

The lamps inside of your vehicle will turn on forabout 10 seconds after your key is removed fromthe ignition to provide an illuminated exit.

Parade DimmingParade dimming is a separate lighting mode ofoperation that is activated if the park lamps areturned on during the day. Usually when the parklamps are turned on during the day, the display’sillumination and LEDs become lower and thebacklighting is activated. To avoid this condition,backlighting is turned off, and the displays andLEDs are set to a high predetermined intensitywhen daylight conditions are detected to enhancethe display’s visibility during daytime.

Front Reading LampsPush the lens to turn the reading lamps on andoff. The reading lamps will turn on when the dooris open if the dome lamp is in the door position.The reading lamps will also turn on with the domelamp switch in the on position. The lamps willnot turn on if the door is open and the domelamp is in the off position.

Rear Reading LampsThe vehicle’s dome lamp may have two readinglamps. The reading lamps turn on and off bypushing on the lens.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.

Cargo LampIf your vehicle is the MAXX model, it has a cargolamp. The cargo lamp comes on when the liftgate isopened. If you want to leave the liftgate open youcan turn off the cargo lamp by pushing on the lens.

186

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery run-down protectionfeature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visorvanity) is left on while the ignition is turned off,the battery run-down protection system willautomatically shut the lamp(s) off after 20 minutes.This will avoid draining the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of thefollowing:

• Turn on the ignition.

• Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.

• Open a door.

• Press any remote keyless entry transmitterbutton (if equipped).

• Press the remote trunk release button.

• Press the power door lock switch.

The battery run-down feature will also be activatedwhen any door on the vehicle is left open andthe ignition is in OFF.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With accessory power outlets you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone.

For vehicles with Traction Control system, theaccessory power outlets are located on the front ofthe center console storage area and also inside theconsole storage compartment. The compartmenthas notches that allow power cords to be routedoutside of the console while the lid is closed. Onvehicles without Traction Control, both outlets arelocated on the front of the center console storagearea. There is also an outlet in the rear cargo areaof the MAXX.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

187

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To usethe lighter, located on the instrument panel belowthe climate controls, push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

188

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle has the remote start feature, theclimate control system will function as part ofthe remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 100.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe fan speed. The fan must be on to run theair-conditioning compressor.

To change the air delivery settings, turn the rightknob to select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets. Some air may be directedtoward the side windows.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets and windshield.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. When thismode is selected, air from outside the vehicle willcirculate throughout your vehicle. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light will come on to let youknow that it is activated. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but it cannot be used withthe recirculation mode. Pressing this button willcancel the recirculation mode.

189

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Whenrecirculation mode is selected, the air inside thevehicle will be recirculated through the climatecontrol system and the vehicle, not from outsideyour vehicle. This mode is helpful when you aretrying to limit odors from entering your vehicle andfor maximum air conditioning performance in hotweather. When the button is pressed, an indicatorlight above the button will come on to let you knowthat it is activated. The recirculation indicator lightwill blink three times if you try to use recirculation ina mode that it can not be used in. Only use thismode when it is needed for comfort, since windowfogging will rapidly occur if the air conditioningcompressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button will cancel the outside airmode. When you switch to the defog or defrostmodes the system will automatically move fromrecirculation to outside air. When the vehicle or fanis turned off and back on, the system will default tooutside air automatically. Only use recirculationmode when it is needed for comfort, since windowfogging may occur.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

When it’s cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower,use the engine coolant heater, if equipped, toprovide warmer air faster to your vehicle. Anengine coolant heater warms the coolant that theengine uses to provide heat to warm the insideof your vehicle. For more information, see EngineCoolant Heater on page 125.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When the airconditioning button is pressed, an indicator light willcome on to let you know that air conditioning isactivated.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath your vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. Thisis normal.

190

Maximum Air ConditioningOn hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select # air conditioning.

4. Select the ? recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes tochoose from to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to removefog or frost from the windshield more quickly.Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode splits the air betweenthe windshield and the floor outlets with a smallamount directed to the side windows. When youselect this mode, the system turns off recirculationautomatically. The air-conditioning compressor willrun unless the outside temperature is at or belowfreezing. The air-conditioning compressor willoperate although the indicator light will not be on.

191

The air-conditioning indicator light will turn off whendefog is selected. If the air-conditioning button ispressed while in defog mode, the indicator light willturn on. If the button is pressed again, the light willturn off. The recirculation mode cannot be selectedwhile in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicleuntil all the windows are clear.

1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield with some air directed to the floorvents. In this mode, the system will automaticallyforce outside air into your vehicle. Theair-conditioning compressor will run unless theoutside temperature is at or below freezing. Theair-conditioning compressor will operate althoughthe indicator light will not be on. The air-conditioningindicator light will turn off when defrost is selected.If the air-conditioning button is pressed while indefrost mode, the indicator light will turn on. If thebutton is pressed again, the light will turn off.Recirculation cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

To help clear the windshield quickly, do thefollowing:

1. Select the defrost mode.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light willcome on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated. Be sure to clear as muchsnow from the rear window as possible.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If turned on again, the defoggerwill only run for about seven minutes before turningoff. The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

192

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window defogger willremain on once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger will automatically be turned on if it iscold outside. When the vehicle transitions out ofthe remote start mode, the rear defogger willturn off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

Automatic Climate Control SystemIf your vehicle has this system, you canautomatically control the heating, coolingand ventilation in your vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fanspeed control and the air delivery mode controlknobs to activate the automatic system. Whenautomatic operation is active the system willcontrol the inside temperature and air delivery.

193

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Place the fan knob and the mode knobto AUTO.The display will now show the current settemperature. When auto is selected, the airconditioning operation and air inlet will beautomatically controlled. The air conditioningcompressor will run when the outsidetemperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The airinlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hotoutside, the air inlet may automatically switch torecirculate inside air to help quickly cool downyour vehicle.

2. Set the temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with an initialtemperature setting and allow about 20 minutesfor the system to regulate. Press the up ordown arrow temperature buttons to adjustthe temperature setting as necessary.

If you choose the temperature setting of 60°F(15°C) the system will remain at the maximumcooling setting. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 90°F (32°C) the system will remain atthe maximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the vehicle toheat or cool any faster.Be careful not to cover the sensor locatedon the top of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulates airtemperature based on sun load, and alsoturns on your headlamps.Also be careful not to cover the sensor grilleon the lower right side of the climate controlfaceplate. This senses the inside vehicletemperature needed for proper regulation.To avoid blowing cold air at start-up in coldweather, the system will delay turning on thefan until warm air is available. The lengthof delay depends on the engine coolanttemperature. Turning the fan knob willoverride this delay and change the fanto a selected speed.

194

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, theclimate control display will initially show “AS” inplace of the temperature to indicate the remote starthas been activated. The system will automaticallyregulate the temperature according to the following:

• If inside air temperature is below 72°F (22°C),the system will automatically adjust to thefollowing settings: highest fan speed, defrostmode, recirculation, and the full heat position.

• If inside air temperature is above 79°F (26°C)the system will automatically adjust to thefollowing settings: highest fan speed, panelmode, recirculation, and full cold position.

• If inside air temperature is between 72°F (22°C)and 79°F (26°C), the system will adjustautomatically to the following settings : mediumfan speed, panel mode, recirculation, and thefull cold position.

The climate control will change back to manualoperation by turning on the vehicle with thekey. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100.

The heater works best if you keep the windowsclosed while using it.

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knobto turn off the entire climate control system.Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and will bedirected to the floor. This direction can be changedby changing the mode position. The temperaturecan also be adjusted using either the up ordown arrow temperature buttons.

9 (Fan): The knob with the fan symbol allowsyou to manually adjust the fan speed.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets and windshield.

195

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. When thismode is selected, air from outside the vehiclewill circulate throughout your vehicle. When thebutton is pressed, an indicator light will come on tolet you know that it is activated. The outside airmode can be used with all modes, except with therecirculation mode. Pressing this button willcancel the recirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Whenrecirculation mode is selected, the air inside thevehicle will be recirculated through the climatecontrol system and the vehicle, not from outsideyour vehicle. This mode is helpful when you aretrying to limit odors from entering your vehicle andfor maximum air conditioning performance in hotweather. When the button is pressed, an indicatorlight above the button will come on to let you knowthat it is activated. The recirculation indicator lightwill blink three times if you try to use recirculation ina mode that it can not be used in. Only use thismode when it is needed for comfort, since windowfogging will rapidly occur if the air conditioningcompressor is not engaged.

Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculationfeature. Each time the vehicle is started, the systemwill revert to the auto recirculation function.

If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog orfloor, the light on the button will flash three timesand go out to let you know this is not allowed. Thisis to prevent window fogging.

When the weather is cool or damp, operating thesystem in recirculation for extended periods of timemay cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. Toclear the fog, select either defog or defrost. Makesure the air conditioning is on. You will want to allowthe air conditioning to run automatically to helpdehumidify the air.

xw (Temperature Control): Press the upand down arrows to increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning compressor on and off. A lightabove the button will illuminate when the airconditioning is on.

196

When air conditioning is selected or in AUTOmode, the system will run the air conditioningautomatically to cool and dehumidify the airentering the vehicle.On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.On cool, but sunny days while using manualoperation of the automatic system, use bi-level todeliver warm air to the floor and cooler air tothe instrument panel outlets. To warm or cool theair delivered, press the temperature buttons tothe desired setting.In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidifythe air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTOmode, the system will maximize its performanceby using recirculation as necessary.On cold days when using manual operation of theautomatic system, choose floor mode to deliver airto the floor outlets. To warm or cool the airdelivered, push the temperature buttons to thedesired setting.If you want to use the automatic mode, turn theknob to AUTO and adjust the temperature bypressing the temperature buttons.

Defogging and DefrostingYou can use either defog or front defrost to clearfog or frost from your windshield. Use the defogmode to clear the windows of fog or moisture.Use the front defrost button to defrost the frontwindshield.

- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windowsof fog or moisture. Turn the mode knob to thisposition to select this setting. This setting willdeliver air to the floor and windshield outlets.

0 (Defrost): Turn the mode knob to thisposition to defrost the windshield. The systemwill automatically control the fan speed if youselect defrost from AUTO mode. If the outsidetemperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your airconditioning compressor will automatically run tohelp dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Theair conditioning indicator light will blink three timesif you try to turn off the compressor while inthis mode.

197

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light abovethe button will come on to let you know that therear window defogger is activated.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If you need additional warmingtime, press the button again.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear window defogger will remain ononce the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors this button willalso activate that feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger and heated mirrors will automaticallybe turned on if it is cold outside. The indicatorlight will not be on. When the vehicle transitionsout of remote start mode the rear defoggerand heated mirrors will turn off.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

198

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheels on the air outlets, located onthe center and on the sides of the instrument panel,to change the horizontal direction of the airflow. Usethe tabs on the outlet vanes to change the verticaldirection of the airflow. Use the tabs on the outletvanes to shut off airflow to the outlets.

The two upper outlets in the center of theinstrument panel are dedicated to the rear seats.These outlets are fixed to aim airflow into the rearseats to help cool the rear occupants in hotweather. Airflow can be shut off at the upperoutlets by turning the vertical thumbwheel. Thelouvers are fixed, do not attempt to move them orthey may break.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

• When an objectionable odor outside thevehicle is encountered, use the recirculationmode, with the temperature knob at acomfortable setting to prevent the odor fromentering the vehicle through the ventilationsystem. This can be helpful when drivingthrough a long tunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of this mode in coldor cool weather can cause window fogging.

199

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there could be orthere is a problem with one of your vehicle’sfunctions. As you will see in the details on the nextfew pages, some warning lights come on brieflywhen you start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there could be or thereis a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work together tolet you know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly — and even dangerous.Get to know your warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to letyou know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You’ll know how fast you’re going, how muchfuel you’re using, and many other things you willneed to drive safely and economically.

200

Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that areexplained on the following pages.

United States Base version shown, Canada and SS Model Similar

201

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someonetries to turn it back.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the newone can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’sset at zero and a label must be put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileage readingwhen the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far you havedriven since you last reset it.

The trip odometer is accessed and reset throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICOperation and Displays on page 219 for moreinformation.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows your engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

202

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remind peopleto fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safetybelt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 84 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and lightis repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

203

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 74.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

204

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will light ONand OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. If you use remote startto start your vehicle, if you have this feature, youmay not see the system check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let youknow the status of the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint.


205

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 84 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 204.

206

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on fora few secondswhen you turn on theignition as a checkto indicate it is working.

If the light stays on, or comes on while you aredriving and you hear a chime, there could be aproblem with the electrical charging system. Thiscould indicate that there is a loose generator drivebelt or another electrical problem. Have it checkedright away. Driving while this light is on could drainthe battery and result in the engine and headlightssuddenly shutting off.

If you must drive a short distance with this lighton, turn off accessories, such as the radio,air conditioner and heater fan.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For good braking,though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.


207

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display aBRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 222 for more information.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. Try turningoff and restarting the vehicle one or two times, if thelight is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 328.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has theanti-lock brake system,the light will comeon when your engine isstarted and may stayon for several seconds.That’s normal.

208

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If the lightcomes on and the chime sounds when you aredriving, stop as soon as possible and turn theignition off. Then start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Ifthe regular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning light isalso on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and thereis a problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 207 earlier in thissection.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON.This is normal. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If your vehicle hasthe Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TC(traction control) button located on the centerconsole, the light will come on and stay on. Toturn the system back on, press the button againand the warning light should go out.

• If there is a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, the TCSwill turn off and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time whenthe system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

209

Traction Control SystemActive Light

If your vehicle has theTraction Control System(TCS), this light willcome on whenthe system is limitingwheel spin.

Slippery road conditions may exist if the TCSactive light comes on, so adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The light will stay on for a few seconds after thesystem stops limiting wheel spin.

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TC(traction control) button located on the centerconsole, the light will come on and stay on. Toturn the system back on, press the button againand the warning light should go out.

• If there’s a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, the ETSwill turn off and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time whenthe system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

210

Enhanced Traction SystemActive Light

If your vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightwill come on whenthe system is limitingwheel spin.

Slippery road conditions may exist if the EnhancedTraction System active light comes on, so adjustyour driving accordingly.

The light will stay on for a few seconds after thesystem stops limiting wheel spin.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicatesthat the engine coolanthas overheated orthe radiator cooling fanis not working.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working.

If the light comes on and the vehicle has beenoperating under normal driving conditions, pull offthe road, stop the vehicle, and turn off theengine as soon as possible.

See Cooling System on page 373 for moreinformation.

211

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,the light comes on and you hear a chime, yourengine is too hot! It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions and the gage reads hot,you should pull off the road, stop your vehicleand turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 370.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes onto indicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle.This system is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.


212

Notice: If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the originaltires with other than those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) can affect yourvehicle’s emission controls and may causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 342.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

213

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park yourvehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 secondsand restart the engine. If the light remains onsteady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps,and see your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 347.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

214

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 344. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmedup.) This will be detected by the system and causethe light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if you have recently replacedyour battery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

215

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine,or come on and you willhear a chime whenyou are driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working.If it does not come on with the ignition on, youmay have a problem with the bulb. Have itfixed right away.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

216

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 116.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 176 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 172.

217

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel youhave left, when the ignition is on. When theindicator nears empty, this light, located left of thepump symbol, will come on and you will hear achime. You still have a little fuel left, but you shouldget more soon. The arrow on the fuel gage points toside of the vehicle with the fuel door.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.These are normal and do not indicate a problemwith your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn offthe ignition.


218

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) providesthe following:

• A way to personalize your vehicle

• Trip information

• Warning messages

The buttons used to activate the DIC are locatedon the left side of the vehicle’s audio system.

INFO/4 (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

MENU: Press this button to enter and scrollthrough the menu mode.

ENTER/r (Enter): Press this button toselect a menu option or to acknowledge awarning message.

The DIC messages will be read through youraudio system display.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is ON. If yourvehicle has the uplevel audio system, the timeand outside temperature is shown on the first lineof the display and the DIC information is shownon the second line of the display.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following section.


219

Information Mode

INFO/4 (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displaysin the following order:• TRIP A• TRIP B• FUEL RANGE (Fuel Range Until Empty)• ECON (Average Fuel Economy)• AV SPEED (Average Vehicle Speed)• OIL LIFE (Engine Oil Life System)

TRIP A or TRIP B: Press the information buttonuntil TRIP A or TRIP B is displayed. This shows thecurrent distance traveled since the last reset foreach trip odometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers(km). Both odometers can be used at the sametime. Each trip odometer can be reset to zeroseparately by pressing and holding the enter buttonfor a few seconds while the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

FUEL RANGE: Press the information buttonuntil FUEL RANGE is displayed. This shows theremaining distance you can drive without refueling.It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remainingin the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWdisplays.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. Fuel range cannot be reset.

ECON (Economy): Press the information buttonuntil ECON is displayed. Average fuel economyis how many miles per gallon (mpg) or litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle isgetting based on current and past drivingconditions.

Press and hold the enter button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fueleconomy is not reset, it will be continuallyupdated each time you drive.

AV (Average) SPEED: Press the informationbutton until AV SPEED is displayed. This showsthe vehicle’s average speed in miles per hour(mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

Press and hold the enter button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

220

OIL LIFE: Press the information button untilOIL LIFE is displayed. The engine oil life systemshows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.It shows 100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It will alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system after anoil change. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 360.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 460 and EngineOil on page 357.

Personalization

MENU: Press this button while the ignition is ON toscroll through each of the personalization options inthe following order. To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended that the headlamps areturned off. If the vehicle is moving faster than 2 mph(3 km/h), the personalization menu options are notavailable, except for the UNITS option.

All of the personalization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the options availabledisplay on the DIC.

• Oil Life Reset

• Units Selection (English/Metric)

• Remote Start Capability

• Horn Chirp During Remote Keyless EntryLocking

• Horn Chirp During Remote Keyless EntryUnlocking

• Exterior Light Flash During Remote KeylessEntry Locking or Unlocking

• Delayed Locking

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: Specific Doors• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: When Key is Off

or When Shift To Park• Exterior Perimeter Lighting During Remote

Keyless Entry Unlock• Select Language: (English, French, Spanish or

German)

221

When the desired option is reached, press theenter button to toggle between the modes of thatoption. To make a selection, press the MENUbutton again.If no selection is made within 10 seconds, thedisplay reverts back to the previous informationdisplayed.The MENU mode is exited when the informationbutton is pressed, a 10 second time periodhas elapsed, the ignition is turned to OFF,or the end of the MENU list is reached.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 225 formore information on the personalization options.

Enter

ENTER/r (Enter): Press this button to resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC display. This buttonalso toggles through the options available in eachpersonalization menu.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.A message will clear when that condition is nolonger present on the vehicle. To acknowledge amessage and clear it from the display, pressany of the three DIC buttons. If the condition isstill present, the warning message will come backon the next time the vehicle is turned off andback on. With most messages, a warning chimesounds when the message displays. Yourvehicle may have other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF: This messagedisplays if the automatic headlamp system isdisabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON: This messagedisplays if the automatic headlamp system isenabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUID: This message displays to informthe driver that the brake fluid level is low while theignition is in ON. The brake system warning light onthe instrument panel cluster also comes on. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 207 for moreinformation. Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible.

222

CHANGE OIL SOON: This message displayswhen the life of the engine oil has expired and itshould be changed.

When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, you stillmust reset the engine oil life system separately.See Engine Oil Life System on page 360, EngineOil on page 357, and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 460 for more information.

CHECK GAS CAP: This message displays if thefuel cap has not been fully tightened. Recheckthe fuel cap to make sure that it is on properly.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the message off.

DOOR AJAR: This message displays if one ormore of the vehicle’s doors are not closed properly.When this message displays, make sure that thedoor is closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLED: This message displaysif the starting of the engine is disabled. Have yourvehicle serviced immediately by your dealer.

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED: Thismessage displays to inform you that the vehiclehas reduced engine power to avoid damaging theengine. Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle maybe driven at a reduced speed while this message ison, but acceleration and speed may be reduced.Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle shouldbe taken to your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

GATE AJAR: If your vehicle has a liftgate, thismessage displays when the liftgate is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the liftgate is closedcompletely. See Liftgate (MAXX) on page 113 formore information.

ICE POSSIBLE: This message displays when theoutside air temperature is cold enough to createicy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

223

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW: This messagedisplays if the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery inthe transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 100.

LOW FUEL: This message displays along witha low fuel warning light on the instrument panelcluster when your vehicle is low on fuel. Refill thefuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel onpage 344 and Filling the Tank on page 347.

LOW WASHER FLUID: This message displayswhen your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid.Refill the windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See “Adding Washer Fluid”under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 380.

POWER STEERING: This message displays if aproblem has been detected with the electric powersteering, if your vehicle has this feature. Have yourvehicle serviced immediately by your dealer.

PUSH PARK PEDAL: This message displays ifthe parking brake is left engaged. See ParkingBrake on page 134 for more information.

SERVICE AIR BAG: This message displays ifthere is a problem with the airbag system. Haveyour vehicle serviced immediately by your dealer.

TRUNK AJAR: If your vehicle has a trunk, thismessage displays when the trunk lid is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk lid isclosed completely. See Trunk (Sedan) onpage 112 for more information.

224

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationThe following personalization options may appearon your vehicle’s audio display by pressing theMENU button:

OIL LIFE RESET: When this option is displayed,you can reset the engine oil life system. To resetthe system, see Engine Oil Life System onpage 360.

UNITS: When UNITS appears on the display,press the enter button to move between METRICor ENGLISH. When you have made your choice,press the MENU button to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is English for theUnited States and metric for Canada.If you choose English, all information will bedisplayed in English units. For example, distancein miles (mi) and fuel economy in miles pergallon (mpg) is displayed.If you choose metric, all information will bedisplayed in metric units. For example, distancein kilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) is displayed.The unit measurement will also change the tripodometer, temperature, and average fuel economydisplays.

REMOTE START: If your vehicle has this feature,the remote start option can be enabled or disabled.When REMOTE START appears on the display,press the enter button to move between OFF andON. When you have made your choice, press theMENU button to record your selection. The initialsetting from the factory is ON.

LOCK HORN: If your vehicle has Remote KeylessEntry (RKE), this option which allows the vehicle’shorn to chirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When LOCK HORN appears on the display, pressthe enter button to move between ON and OFF.When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton to record your selection. The initial settingfrom the factory is OFF.

UNLOCK HORN: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allows thevehicle’s horn to chirp every time the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed, can be enabledor disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on thedisplay, press the enter button to move betweenON and OFF. When you have made your choice,press the MENU button to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is OFF.

225

LIGHT FLASH: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allows thevehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting to flash everytime the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons onthe RKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on thedisplay, press the enter button to move betweenOFF and ON. When you have made your choice,press the MENU button to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is ON.DELAY LOCK: The delayed locking option, whichdelays the actual locking of the vehicle, can beenabled or disabled. When DELAY LOCK appearson the display, press the enter button to movebetween OFF and ON. When you have made yourchoice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.AUTO UNLK (Unlock): The automatic doorunlocking option, which allows the vehicle toautomatically unlock certain doors can be enabledor disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on thedisplay, press the enter button to move betweenALL, DRIVER, or NONE. When you have madeyour choice, press and the MENU button to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factory isALL. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks onpage 110 for more information.

UNLK (Unlock): This screen displays only ifDRIVER or ALL is selected for the AUTO UNLKoption. This option determines when the automaticdoor unlocking will occur, when either the keyis turned to OFF or the vehicle is shifted intoPARK (P). When UNLK appears on the display,press the enter button to move between KEY OFFand SHIFT TO P (Park). When you have made yourchoice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory isSHIFT TO P (Park). See Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks on page 110 for more information.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS: If your vehicle hasRemote Keyless Entry (RKE), this option, whichallows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting toturn on each time the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display, pressthe enter button to move between ON and OFF.When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton to record your selection. The initial settingfrom the factory is ON.

226

LANGUAGE: To select your choice of language,press the enter button to move between theoptional languages.

The languages are ENGLISH, FRENCH,SPANISH, and GERMAN.

Choosing a language will display all of theinformation on the DIC in the desired language.

When you have made your choice, press theMENU button for at least one second to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factory isENGLISH.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity fora safer driving experience. See DefensiveDriving on page 288. By taking a few momentsto read this manual and get familiar with yourvehicle’s audio system, you can use it with lesseffort, as well as take advantage of its features.

While your vehicle is parked, set up your audiosystem by presetting your favorite radio stations,setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,when driving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 288.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

227

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 122 for more information.

Setting the Time for Radios withoutRadio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. The clocksymbol appears on the display and the hournumber flashes. Turn the ADJ (adjust) knob toincrease or to decrease the hours. To set theminutes, press the clock button again. The minutenumbers flashes. Turn the ADJ knob to increase orto decrease the minutes. The time can be set withthe ignition on or off.

228

Setting the Time for Radios withRadio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. The clocksymbol appears on the display and the hournumber flashes. Turn the ADJ (adjust) knob toincrease or to decrease the hours. To set theminutes, press the clock button again. The minutenumbers flashes. Turn the ADJ knob to increase orto decrease the minutes. The time can be set withthe ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the clock button toenter the clock set mode, then press and hold theclock button for three seconds until UPDATEDdisplays. If the time is not available from thestation, NO UPDATE displays.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuningto an RDS broadcast station, it can take a fewminutes for the time to update.

Radio with CD (Base Level)

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

u (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

United States shown, Canada similar

229

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the time and the temperature orthe radio station frequency and the temperature.When the ignition is off, press this knob to displaythe time.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until the desired option displays,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radioproduces a beep and the selected displaybecomes the default.

Finding a Station

AM/FM/CD: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and CD. The selection displays.

ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

SEEK w / SEEK x: Press the SEEK up buttonor the SEEK down button to go to the next orto the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKbutton for two seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK button again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSEEK button for more than four seconds untiltwo beeps sound. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next preset station.Press either SEEK button again to stop scanningpresets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM/FM/CD to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

230

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass orthe treble, press and release the tone button untilBASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turn the ADJ(adjust) knob to increase or to decrease thetone. If a station is weak or has static, decreasethe treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BASS or TREB. Then press and hold thetone button for more than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust the tone controls to the middle position,first exit tone by pressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that function, or by waitingfive seconds until the default display returns.Then press and hold the tone button for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds. ALLCENTERED displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE /S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the left speakers,press and release the balance and fade button untilBAL (balance) displays. Turn the ADJ knob to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release the balance and fadebutton until FADE displays. Then turn the ADJ knobto move the sound toward the front or the rearspeakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middleposition, select BAL or FADE. Then press andhold the balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To adjust the speaker controls to the middleposition, first exit balance and fade by pressinganother button, causing the radio to perform thatfunction, or by waiting five seconds until the defaultdisplay returns. Then press and hold the balanceand fade button for more than two seconds untilA beep sounds. ALL CENTERED displays.

231

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays, it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicleand must be returned to your dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. Ifyou want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP knob.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing, where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs and DVDs on page 284 for moreinformation.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

232

Do not add any label to a CD, it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded ona personal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

1s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

2\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

3 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton onceto hear a track over again. REPEAT ON and RPTdisplays. The current track continues to repeat.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEATOFF displays and RPT disappears from thedisplay.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.T#, RANDOM, and RDM displays. Press RDMagain to turn off random play. RANDOM OFFdisplays and RDM disappears.

SEEK w: Press this button to go to the nexttrack. The track number displays. If this button ispressed more than once, the player continuesmoving forward through the CD.

If this button is held for more than two seconds, theCD enters CD scan mode and the CD plays the first10 seconds of each track. Press this button again tostop scanning.

233

SEEK x: Press this button to go to the start ofthe current track if more than eight secondshave played. The track number displays. If thisbutton is pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving backward through the CD.

If this button is held for more than two seconds, theCD enters CD scan mode and the CD plays the first10 seconds of each track. Press this button again tostop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see thecurrent track number, time, and temperature or thetrack number, the elapsed time of the track, andthe temperature.

To change the default on the display, press thisknob until the desired option displays, thenhold the knob for two seconds. A beep soundsand the selected display becomes the default.

AM/FM/CD: Press this button when listening tothe radio to play a CD.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press this button to eject aCD. Eject can be activated with either theignition or radio off. CDs can be loaded with theignition and radio off if this button is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

234

Radio with CD (Uplevel) Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.


235

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contactXM™; In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Playing the Radio


u (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the time and the temperature orthe radio station frequency and the temperature.When the ignition is off, press this knob to displaythe time.

For RDS, press this knob to change what displayswhile using RDS. The display options are stationname, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the nameof the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press this knob while inXM mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until you see the desired display, thenhold the knob for two seconds. The radio producesa beep and the selected display becomes thedefault.

236

AUTOu (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTOVOL LOW (automatic volume low), AUTO VOLMEDIUM (automatic volume medium), or AUTOVOL HIGH (automatic volume high) displays.Each higher setting allows for more volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, automatic volume increases the volume,as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. Thevolume level should always sound the same to youas you drive. AUTO VOL NONE (automatic volumenone) displays if the radio cannot determine thevehicle speed or if the engine is not running. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until AUTOVOL OFF (automatic volume off) displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Theselection displays.


xSEEK w: Press the down or up arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes toa station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrow again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first preset station stored onthe pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next preset station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning presets.


237

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press AUTO TONE (automatic tone) orAUTO EQ (automatic equalization) toselect the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the stationthat was set, returns and the equalization thatwas selected is stored for that pushbutton.


Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press and releasethis button until BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the ADJ knob to increase orto decrease the tone. The display shows the bass,midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak or hasstatic, decrease the treble.To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB. Thenpress and hold the tone button for more thantwo seconds. One beep sounds and the tonecontrol adjusts to the middle position.To adjust all tone controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button while no tone controldisplays. ALL CENTERED displays and a beepsounds. The bass, midrange, and treble adjusts tothe middle position.AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forcountry, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOTONE or AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM displays.You can also manually adjust the bass, midrange,and treble using the tone button.

238


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the left speakers,push and release the balance and fade button untilBAL displays. Turn the ADJ knob to move thesound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the balance and fadebutton until FADE displays. Turn the ADJ (adjust)knob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, select BAL or FADE. Then press andhold the balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. One beep sounds and the speakercontrol adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the tone button whileno speaker control displays. ALL CENTEREDdisplays and one beep sounds. The balanceand fade adjusts to the middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE forXM and a program type displays.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press theSEEK up arrow to select the PTY and go tothe PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY pressthe SEEK up arrow again. If the radio cannotfind the desired PTY, NONE FOUND displaysand the radio returns to the last station youwere listening to.After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPEbutton is pressed again, the radio exits programtype select mode.

239

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BANDfor two seconds. FM ALT FREQ ON and AFdisplays. The radio can switch to stations with astronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. FM ALT FREQ OFFdisplays and AF disappears. The radio does notswitch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement.Alert announcements cannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current station has amessage, MSG displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage displays every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the MSGbutton. A new group of words display after everypress of the button. Once the complete messagehas displayed, MSG disappears until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the MSG button. The lastmessage can be viewed until a new message isreceived or a different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO MESSAGE displays.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAFFIC displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button andthe radio seeks to a station that does. Whena station that broadcasts traffic announcementsis found, the radio stops seeking and TRAFbetween brackets appears on display.

240

If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays, it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicle and itmust be returned to your dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up.Take your vehicle to your dealer for service.


Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 258 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP (display) knob.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing, where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can bean increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting.

241

If these problems occur, check the bottom surfaceof the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD willnot play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled,see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 284 formore information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.



s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track displays.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance quickly within a track. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethe button to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to hear atrack over again. REPEAT ON and RPT displays.The current track continues to repeat. PressRPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT OFFdisplays and RPT disappears.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.T#, RANDOM, and RDM displays, T and the tracknumber displays when each track starts to play.Press RDM again to turn off random play.RANDOM OFF displays and RDM disappears.

242

xSEEK w: Press the down arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. If this arrow is pressed more thanonce, the player continues moving backwardthrough the CD.

Press the up arrow to go to the start of the nexttrack. If this arrow is pressed more than once, theplayer continues moving forward through the CD.

If either arrow is held or pressed for more thantwo seconds, the CD enters CD scan mode and theCD plays the first 10 seconds of each track. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. T, the tracknumber, and the elapsed time of the track appearson the display. To change the default on thedisplay, time or elapsed time, press the knob untilthe desired option displays, then hold the knob fortwo seconds. The radio produces one beep and theselected display becomes the default. Pressing thisbutton also displays text on commercially recordedCDs (if available).

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select thedesired equalization setting while playing a CD.The equalization is automatically recalled when aCD is played. For more information, see AUTOTONE/AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play aCD or to access a remote device (if installed)while listening to the radio.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press this button to ejecta CD. Eject may be activated with either theignition or radio off. CDs can be loaded with theignition and radio off if this button is pressed first.

243

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:


• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.


• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.


If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.


Radio with Six-Disc CD


244

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the displayinstead of the frequency. RDS stations can alsoprovide the time of day, a program type (PTY) forcurrent programming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contactXM™; In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

245

Playing the Radio


u (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between time and temperature or radiostation frequency and temperature. When theignition is off, press this knob to display the time.

For RDS, press the DISP knob to change whatdisplays while using RDS. The display options arestation name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob whilein XM mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until the desired option displays, thenhold the knob for two seconds. A beep sounds andthe selected display becomes the default.

AUTOu (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTOVOL LOW (automatic volume low), AUTO VOLMEDIUM (automatic volume medium), or AUTOVOL HIGH (automatic volume high) displays.Each higher setting allows for more volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, automatic volume increases the volume,as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. Thevolume level should always sound the same to youas you drive. AUTO VOL NONE (automatic volumenone) displays if the radio cannot determine thevehicle speed or if the engine is not running. To turnautomatic volume off, press this button until AUTOVOL OFF (automatic volume off) displays.

246

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Theselection displays.


xSEEK w: Press the down or up arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes toa station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrow again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first preset station stored onthe pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next preset station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning presets.


Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press AUTO TONE (automatic tone) orAUTO EQ (automatic equalization) toselect the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.


247

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE /P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press and releasethis button until BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the ADJ knob to increase orto decrease the tone. The display shows the bass,mid, or treble level. If a station is weak or has static,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB. Thenpress and hold the tone button for more thantwo seconds. The display level adjusts to themiddle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button when no tonecontrol displays. ALL CENTERED displays and abeep sounds.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forcountry, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

The equalization setting last chosen displays whenyou first press this button. Each time you press thisbutton, another equalization setting displays andautomatic tone or automatic equalization switchesto that preset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOTONE or AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM displays.Then manually adjust the bass, midrange, andtreble using the tone button.

248


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the left speakers,push and release the balance and fade button untilBAL (balance) displays. Turn the ADJ (adjust) knobto move the sound toward the right or the leftspeakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the balance and fadebutton until FADE displays. Turn the ADJ knob tomove the sound toward the front or the rearspeakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and holdthe balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. The display level adjusts to themiddle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold the tone button when nospeaker control is displayed. ALL CENTEREDdisplays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE forXM and a program type displays.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press theSEEK up arrow to select and go to thePTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY pressthe SEEK up arrow again. If the radio cannotfind the desired PTY, NONE FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to thelast station you were listening to.

5. Press P-TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and no longer displays, goback to Step 1.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected PTY andtraffic announcements.

249

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. FM ALT FREQ ON and AF displays.The radio can switch to stations with a strongerfrequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. FM ALT FREQ OFFdisplays and AF disappears. The radio does notswitch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcement comeson the current radio station, ALERT! displays. Youwill hear the announcement, even if the volume islow or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play stopsduring the announcement. Alert announcementscannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current station has amessage, MSG displays. Press this button to seethe message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the MSGbutton. A new group of words display after everypress of this button. Once the complete messagehas displayed, MSG disappears until another newmessage is received. The last message can displayby pressing the MSG button. The last message canbe viewed until a new message is received or adifferent station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO MESSAGE displays.

MSG (Traffic): If TRAFFIC displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcasttraffic announcements, press and hold this buttonfor two seconds and the radio seeks to a stationthat does. When a station that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radio stopsseeking and TRAF between brackets displays.

250

When a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it. If no station is foundthat broadcasts traffic announcements, NOTRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TRAF displays, press and hold the MSG buttonfor two seconds to turn off the trafficannouncements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio MessagesCALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take yourvehicle to your dealer for service.


Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 258 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts toplay, the track number also displays.The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly.

251

If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs and DVDs on page 284 for moreinformation.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.



LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and release the LOAD button.3. Wait for INSERT CD to flash on the display.4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,

label side up. The player pulls the CD in.To insert multiple CDs, do the following:1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and hold the LOAD button for

two seconds.A beep sounds and MULTI LOAD CD, thenINSERT CD and the number displays.

3. Once INSERT CD and the number displays,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, INSERT CD andthe number displays again. After that, you canload another CD. The CD player takes upto six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less thansix, complete Steps 1 through 3. When finishedloading CDs, the radio begins to play the last CDloaded.

252

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD displays and the currently selectedslot number is underlined.

EJECT/Z: To eject a single CD press this button.The radio displays EJECTING CD # and the singleCD symbol flashes until the CD is ready to beremoved. When the CD is ready to be removed itejects part way from the radio and the displaychanges to a flashing REMOVE CD # with thesingle CD symbol flashing until the CD is removed.If the CD is not removed within 25 seconds theradio pulls it back in.

To eject multiple CDs, press and hold the ejectbutton until a beep sounds and EJECTING ALLCDS displays with the single CD symbol flashing.The CD symbol flashes until a CD is ready to beremoved. When the CD is ready to be removed itejects part way from the radio and the displaychanges to a flashing REMOVE CD # with thesingle CD symbol flashing until the CD is removed.If the CD is not removed within 25 seconds theradio pulls it back in. After the CD is removed theradio repeats the previous actions until all of theCDs have been removed or a CD is pulled back in.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number displays. To play aspecific CD, press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bardisplays under the CD number that is playing, andthe track number also displays.


s (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release this button to playthe passage. T#, the elapsed time, and REV(reverse) displays.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release the button to play thepassage. T#, the elapsed time, and FWD (forward)displays.

253

RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackor an entire CD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. REPEAT ON andRPT displays. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play. REPEAT OFF displays and RPTdisappears.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for more thantwo seconds. REPEAT ON and RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.REPEAT OFF displays and RPT disappears.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be played in random, rather thansequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks in random order on the CDthis is currently playing, press the RDM button.RANDOM TRACKS and RDM displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOMOFF displays and RDM disappears.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded, in random order, press and hold theRDM button for more than two seconds.A beep sounds, RANDOM ALL CDS, and RDMdisplays. Press RDM again to turn off randomplay. RANDOM OFF displays and RDMdisappears.

xSEEK w: Press the down arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than eight secondshave played. Press the up arrow to go to thebeginning of the next track. If either arrow is heldor pressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

To scan the current CD, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than two seconds. The CDgoes to the next track, plays the first 10 seconds,then goes to the next track. Press either SEEKarrow again to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds. The CDgoes to the next CD, plays the first 10 seconds ofthe first track, then goes to the next CD. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

254

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch betweentime, temperature, and the elapsed time of thetrack. To change the default display (CD#/Track#/Time, CD#/Track#/Temperature, or Track#/ElapsedTime/Temperature), press the knob until thedesired option displayed, then hold the knob fortwo seconds. The radio produces one beep andthe selected display becomes the default.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select thedesired equalization setting while playing a CD.The equalization is set whenever a CD is played.For more information, see “AUTO TONE” or“AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainsinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CDor to access the remote device, when listeningto the radio.

Using Song List / R ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature called songlist. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:1. Turn the radio on and load it with at least

one CD. See “LOAD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not display.If S-LIST is displayed, press the SONG LISTbutton to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKleft arrow to locate the track to be saved. Thetrack begins to play.

4. Press and hold the song list button for two ormore seconds to save the track into memory.When song list is pressed, one beep sounds.After two seconds of pressing song listcontinuously, two beeps sound to confirm thatthe track has been saved and TRACK numberADDED displays.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

255

SONG LIST FULL displays if you try to save morethan 20 selections.To play the song list, press the song list button.One beep sounds and SONG LIST displays.The recorded tracks begin to play in the orderthat they were saved.Seek through the song list by using the SEEKarrows. Seeking past the last saved track returnsyou to the first saved track.To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:1. Turn the CD player on.2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.

SONG LIST displays.3. Press the SEEK arrows to select the desired

track to be deleted.4. Press and hold the song list button for

two seconds. When song list is pressed,one beep sounds. After two seconds ofcontinuously pressing the song list button, twobeeps sound to confirm that the track has beendeleted and TRACK number DELETEDdisplays.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the song list button for morethan four seconds. A beep sounds, followedby two beeps after two seconds, and afinal beep sounds after four seconds. SONGLIST EMPTY displays indicating that thesong list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to thesong list again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the song list button.One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed fromthe display.

256

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD ejects, it could be for one of the followingreasons:


• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother,the CD should play.


• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.


If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.


257

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/ProgramTitle not available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

258

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure in thereceiver module

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

259

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemincludes a DVD player, a video display screen,two sets of wireless headphones, and a remotecontrol.This system also functions as a rear seat audio(RSA) system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Without Entertainment System) on page 277 orRear Seat Audio (RSA) (With EntertainmentSystem) on page 279 for more information.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may be disabled from thedriver’s seat by pressing the power button on theradio twice. To resume use of the RSE systempress the RSE power button.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.The DVD system is designed to be inoperablewhen the vehicle is exposed to extremely low orhigh temperatures, in order to protect your systemfrom damage. Operate the DVD system undernormal or comfortable cabin temperature ranges.

HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.

The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF buttonand a volume control. To use the headphonespress, the ON/OFF button. An indicator light on theheadphones will illuminate. If the light does notilluminate, the batteries may need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this sectionfor more information. Press the button to turn theheadphones OFF when not in use.

If the RSE system is shut off or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmitters, located at thetop of the DVD player, for more than three minutes,the headphones will shut off automatically to savethe battery power. If you move too far forward orstep out of the vehicle, the headphones will lose theaudio signal.

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control on the headphones.

Make sure that the headphones are worn correctly,left to right, to ensure the signal is receivedproperly.

260

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

MAXX vehicles with the RSE system mayhave a rear seat storage compartment. Storethe headphones and the remote control in thiscompartment when not in use.

The MAXX vehicles may also include two sets ofwireless headphones with foam ear pads thatcan be replaced.

Foam ear pads on the rear seat headphones maybecome worn or damaged. The headphonefoam ear pads can become damaged if they arenot handled or stored properly. If the headphonefoam ear pads do become damaged or wornout, the foam pads can be replaced separatelyfrom the headphone set. It is not necessaryto replace the complete headphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your dealer for moreinformation.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CDor DVD play, there may be a low hissing noisethrough the speakers and/or headphones. If thehissing sound in the wireless headphones seemsexcessive, make sure that the headphone batteriesare fully charged. Some amount of hissing isnormal.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartmentdoor located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly using the diagram onthe inside of the battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery compartment door andtighten the screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries, and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

261

Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located on the DVD faceplateon the floor console. The RCA jacks allow audioand video signals to be connected from an auxiliarydevice such as a camcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. The yellow RCA jack is used forvideo inputs, the red RCA jack for right audioinputs, and the white RCA jack for left audio inputs.The system requires standard RCA cables, notincluded, to connect the auxiliary device to the RCAjacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions forproper usage.

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connectan external auxiliary device such as a camcorder tothe RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary devicepower and the power on the front of the RSEsystem. Press the play and source buttons at thesame time or the AUX button on the remote controlto switch to the auxiliary device. See “DVD Player”and “Remote Control” later in this section for moreinformation.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices canbe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle’s Speakers

• Wired Headphones (not included)

Only one audio source can be heard through thevehicles speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device can beheard through all of the vehicles speakerswhen the following occurs:

• The RSE system is off

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the SRCEbutton is pressed to enable the RSE system

The headphone symbol will appear on the radiodisplay when the RSE system is on and theheadphone symbol will disappear from the displaywhen it is off.

262

To turn the vehicles rear speakers on and off,press the power button on the RSE system or onthe remote control. When the rear speakersare off, the audio from the RSE system can beheard through both the wireless headphones andthe vehicles front speakers at the same time.

The RSE system can be heard through the wiredheadphones, not included, on the RSE systemwhen the following occurs:

• The RSE system is on

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

The volume on the radio may vary when switchingbetween a radio station, CD, DVD, cassette, orauxiliary device.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CDor DVD play, there may be a low hissing noisethrough the speakers and/or headphones. If thehissing sound in the wireless headphones seemsexcessive, make sure that the headphone batteriesare fully charged. Some amount of hissing isnormal.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located on the back of thefloor console. Open the video screen by rotatingthe screen up and adjust its position as desired.

The video screen may not be able to be rotated upif the rear seat is too far forward. See “Rear SlidingSeat (MAXX Only)” under Rear Seat Operation onpage 17 for more information.

When the video screen is not in use, push it downinto its stored position.

The DVD player and display will continue to operatewhen the video screen is in either the up or downpositions.

The window on the RSE system contains thetransmitter for the wireless headphones and theremote control. If the screen is in the closedposition, the signals will not be available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

263

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located on the end of the floorconsole under the video screen.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the RSE system and/or by the buttons onthe remote control. See “Remote Control” laterin this section for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs ofthe appropriate region code for the country that thevehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is printedon the jackets of most DVDs. Video CDs, standardaudio CDs, and audio CD-Rs can be played by theDVD player. The video screen will display a menuwhen an audio CD or CD-R is playing.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

DVD Player Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSEsystem on and off.

c/Z (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stopplaying, rewinding, or fast forwarding. Pressthis button again to eject a DVD or CD.

k (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play ofa DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CDis playing to pause it. Press it again to continue playof a DVD or CD. When in menu mode, press thisbutton to enter a selection.

264

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): This button isinactive when in DVD mode.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). If the frontseat passengers are listening to the DVD player,the rear seat passengers cannot select XM1or XM2.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween playing a cassette tape or a CD.

xSEEK w: Press the down arrow to go to thebeginning of the current chapter or track if morethan five seconds have played. Press the up arrowto go to the next chapter or track. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

x w (Volume): Press the up or down arrow toincrease or decrease the volume on the wiredheadphones, not included. The arrows on the leftside are for the left headphone and the arrowson the right side are for the right headphone.

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start if the vehicle is in the CAPposition, ACC, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure thatthe DVD player is on, then press the play/pausebutton on the player faceplate or on the remotecontrol.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or thepreviews. Some DVDs will begin playing afterthe previews have finished. If the DVD does notbegin playing at the main title, refer to theon-screen instructions.

265

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release the stopbutton on the DVD player faceplate or the remotecontrol.To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.The movie should resume play from where it waslast stopped if the disc has not been ejected or thestop button has not been pressed twice on theremote control.If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button hasbeen pressed twice on the remote control, press theplay button once to resume play at the beginning ofthe disc. A resume symbol will appear momentarilyon the video screen. When the resume symbol isdisplayed, press the play button again to resumeplayback from where the disc last stopped.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button, on the DVD player or theremote control, to eject the disc.If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,the DVD player will reload the disc after a shortperiod of time. The disc will be stored in the DVDplayer. The DVD player will not resume play of thedisc automatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow on the DVD player and press the desiredbutton. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affectthe ability of the transmitter to receive signals fromthe remote control. If the remote control does notseem to be working, the batteries may need to bereplaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line of sight will affectthe function of the remote control.

Notice: Do not store the remote control inheat or direct sunlight. This could damage theremote control and it would not be coveredby your warranty. Keep the remote controlstored in the rear seat armrest when not in use.

If your vehicle is the Malibu MAXX, your vehiclemay have a rear seat storage compartment. Storethe headphones and the remote control in thiscompartment when not in use.

266

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVDplayer on and off.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject or to loadthe disc.

P (Backlight): Press this button to turn theremote control backlight on. The backlight will timeout after about eight seconds.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

w, x, o, p (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to navigate through DVD menus.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to viewthe media menu. The media menu is differenton every disc. Use the up, down, right, andleft arrow buttons to move the cursor around themedia menu. After making a selection, pressthe enter button. Press this button again to startplay of the disc.

u (Wired Headphone Volume): Press the plusand minus buttons to increase or to decrease thevolume of both wired headphones (not included).

E (Screen Brightness): Press the plus andminus buttons to increase or to decrease theintensity of the video screen.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when a DVD isplaying and/or a menu is active.

s (Rewind): Press this button to rewind the DVDor CD. To stop rewinding, press this button again.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

267

\ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,press this button again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play ofa DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CDis playing to pause it. Press this button again tocontinue the play of the DVD or CD.

While in the menu, press this button to enter aselection. When using RSA or an auxiliary device,pressing this button will play a DVD or a CD if theyare loaded.

g (Previous Chapter/Track): Press this buttonto go to the beginning of the current track orchapter. Press this button again to return to theprevious track or chapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

l (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button toadvance to the beginning of the next chapter ortrack. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Pressthis button twice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

b (Size): Press this button to change thedisplay mode for 4:3 aspect ratio movies. Thisfunction cycles between NORMAL, WIDE,and FULL video modes.

• Normal The horizontal image is not stretched.The borders at the left and the right of thepicture are blanked. All lines of the verticalimage are displayed.

• Wide The horizontal image is non-lineralystretched. The image tends to be stretchedmore at the borders then the middle.The borders are not displayed.

• Full The horizontal image is linearly stretched.All vertical lines are displayed. No borders arepresent.

z (Display): Press this button to display thetitle, chapter, the time of a DVD or track number,the time of a CD, and the menu functions onthe video screen. Press this button again to turnoff the display item.

268

} (Audio Compression): DVDs have a widedynamic audio range. Audio compression may beused to reduce the difference between soft andloud selections of the DVD. Press this buttonto switch the audio compression on and off.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

Setup MenuTo access the setup menu, ensure that a DVD isin the player and the video is stopped. Pressthe display button. Once the menu is activated,use the directional arrows and the enter button tonavigate the screen.

Picture PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows the default viewing preferences to bemodified. Use the remote control up and downarrow buttons to select. The movie may stop whileselections are being made.

TV Shape: The default video screen displaymay be selected from 4:3 letterbox, 4:3 panscan,or 16:9.

Black Level Shift: The default black level to thevideo screen may be adjusted.

Video Shift: The default position of the video onthe display may be adjusted.

Color Settings: The default color setting of thevideo screen may be selected from Personal, Rich,Natural, Soft, or Animation.

Personal Color: The default setting forSaturation, Brightness, and Contrast may beadjusted.

Sound PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows the default sound preferences to bemodified. Use the remote control up and downarrow buttons to select. The movie may stop whileselections are being made.

Analog Output: The default sound output may beselected from Stereo or Dolby® surround.

Dynamic Compression: The default setting maybe selected as On or Off.

Karaoke Vocal: The default setting may beselected as On or Off.

269

Language PreferencesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows the default language preferences to bemodified. Use the remote control up and downarrow buttons to select. The movie may stop whileselections are being made.

Audio Language: The default DVD playbackaudio language may be selected from variouslanguages. The audio output is dependenton whether a DVD supports the selected language.

Subtitle: The default DVD subtitle languagemay be selected from English, Spanish, or French.The subtitle language is dependent on whetherthe DVD supports the selected language.

Menu: The default on-screen display languagemay be selected from various languages.

FeaturesThe USER PREFERENCE SETTINGS menuallows you to modify the default feature preferencesfrom the display. Use the remote control up anddown arrow buttons to select. The movie may stopwhile selections are being made.

Status Window: The status window may beselected as On or Off. The status window providesdisc type, elapsed time, and number of titlesinformation while the menu bar is displayed orthe DVD is stopped.

Help Text: Help text may be selected as On orOff. A help text bar is provided at the bottom ofthe screen describing the functions of an itemselected from any of the user menus.

270

Menu BarThe menu bar can be displayed across the top ofthe screen by pressing the DISPLAY button on theremote control. Selecting icons from the menu barallows adjustments to the audio and video settings.Use the remote control left and right arrow buttonsto scroll through the menu bar. A description of thehighlighted icon will appear at the bottom of thescreen. Use the down arrow to display the optionsfor the highlighted icon.

The movie may stop playing while selections arebeing made.

Current Subtitle Language: The subtitlelanguage may be selected as Off, English,Spanish, or French. The actual subtitle languageis dependent on whether a DVD supports theselected language.

Current Audio Language: The audio languagemay be selected as Off, English, Spanish, orFrench. The actual audio language is dependenton whether a DVD supports the selected language.

Smart Color: This color setting may be selectedwithout changing the default from the colorsettings menu.

Sound Mode: This analog output may bechanged without changing the default from theanalog output menu.

Frame-by-Frame: The DVD will pause andmay be viewed frame-by-frame, in forward orreverse, by using the remote control arrow buttons.Press play to resume play of the DVD. DVDaudio will not be available during selection.

Slow Motion: The DVD will pause and may beviewed in slow motion, at various speeds, inforward or reverse, by using the remote controlarrow buttons. Press play to resume play ofthe DVD. DVD audio will not be available duringselection.

Scan Speeds: The DVD may be viewed in fastmotion, at various speeds, in forward or reverse, byusing the remote control arrow buttons. Press playto resume play of the DVD. DVD audio will not beavailable during selection.

Enlarge Picture: The DVD will pause and theframe may be enlarged by using the remote controlarrow key buttons. Pressing the enter button on theremote control allows panning of the frame usingthe remote control arrow buttons. Press play toresume play of the DVD. DVD audio will not beavailable during selection.

271

Title: Move between DVD titles by using theremote control arrow buttons.

Chapter: Move between DVD chapters by usingthe remote control arrow buttons.

Time Search: The user can jump to different areasof a DVD by using the remote control arrow andenter buttons to select a specific time position.

Favorite Track Selection (FTS): You mayprogram the unit to play only your favorite trackselections from a DVD or Audio CD. For a DVD,FTS is accessed from the Menu bar. For a CD, theFTS screen will appear on the display immediatelywhen the CD is inserted. From the screen, choosethe tracks on the CD that you wish to store, usingthe remote control right and left arrows and theENTER button to select. The player will rememberthe selections and each time the CD is inserted inthe player, only those tracks will be played, if FTS isturned on. The player can remember selections forup to 50 discs. To remove FTS for a disc, the discmust be in the player and the highlighted tracksmust be de-selected. Use the right and left arrowbuttons and the ENTER button or select CLEARALL on the display.

Not all DVDs support all of the feature defaults inthe setup menus. In the event a feature is notsupported, defaults will be provided by theDVD media.

Exit the setup menu by pressing the return buttonon the remote control. If changes are made to thesetup menu, the DVD will resume play from thebeginning.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Unclip the battery door located on the back ofthe remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, using the diagramon the inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

272

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition may not be inthe on position, ACC, orRAP. The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The systemmight be in auxiliarysource mode. Press theAUX button to switchbetween the DVD playerand the auxiliary source.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.


No sound. The volume on theheadphones could be toolow. Adjust the volume onthe right earpiece on thewireless headphones. Ifthe DVD system is beingheard through the vehiclespeakers, adjust thevolume from the radio.The radio must have theRSE enabled by using theSRCE button.

The picture does not fill thescreen. There are blackborders on the top andbottom or on both sides orit looks stretched out.

Press and release the sizecontrol button on theremote control. This will fillthe screen. If there areborders on the top andbottom, the movie mayhave been made that wayfor a standard screen.

I ejected the disc and triedto take it out, but it waspulled back into the slot.

Eject the disc again.

273


The language in the audioor on the screen is wrong.

Press the main displaymenu button on the DVDplayer or the remotecontrol and change theaudio or languageselection on theDVD menu.

The remote control doesnot work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the transmitterwindow. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed. The remotecontrol will not work theRSA control, only theRSE system.

How do I get subtitles onor off?

Press the display buttonon the remote control togo to the DVDs mainmenu. Then follow thescreen prompts.


After stopping the player, Ipush the play button butsometimes the DVD startswhere I left off, andsometimes at thebeginning.

Press the stop button onthe remote control toresume where the DVDleft off. Press the stopbutton twice to start theDVD at the beginning. Ifthe power is off and theDVD is still in the player,press the play button.

The DVD is playing butthere is no picture orsound. The auxiliarysource is running butthere is no picture orsound.

Press and release theAUX button on the remotecontrol or the SRCE andplay buttons on the DVDplayer to get to auxiliaryinput. Check to make surethat the auxiliary source isconnected to the inputsproperly.

The audio or video skipsor jumps.

The DVD could be dirty orscratched. Try cleaningthe DVD.

274


When I return to the DVDfrom the system menu,sometimes it plays fromthe beginning andsometimes from where itleft off.

If the stop button waspressed once, it resumesplay from where it left off.If the stop button waspressed twice, it will startat the beginning of theDVD. However, if achange was made to themenu the DVD will startfrom where it left off, evenif the stop button was onlypressed once.

The fast forward, reverse,previous, and nextfunctions do not work.

Some commands that doone thing for DVDs willnot always work orperform the same functionfor audio CDs or games.These functions may alsobe disabled when theDVD is playing thecopyright information orthe previews.


My disc is stuck in theplayer. The eject buttondoes not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn thepower off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to force orremove the disc from theplayer. If the problempersists, return to yourGM dealer for furtherassistance.

I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your GM dealerfor assistance.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byblocking the transmittingarea between theheadphones and thetransmitter on the DVDplayer. Make surenothing is between theheadphones and the DVDplayer.

275


DVD System inoperable. In severe or extremetemperatures your DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C) coulddamage the DVD system.Operate the DVD systemunder normal orcomfortable cabintemperature ranges.

The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that theheadphones are facing tothe front of the vehicle,left and right sides areindicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal is receivedproperly.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and the signalare good.

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen:

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed if a disc is inserted upside down,if the disc is not readable, or if the disc formatis not compatible.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayedif the mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratchedor damaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will bedisplayed if the region code of the DVD is notcompatible with the region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayedif the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.

Disc Not Present: This message will be displayedwhen the play or the stop button is pressedwithout a disc in the player.

276

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with video distortionwhen operating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*,two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampened withclean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning the screen, as damagemay result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Without Entertainment System)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the sources: radio, cassette, andCDs. An audio or radio source may be listened tobut cannot be changed from the RSE if the frontseat passengers have selected the same sourcefrom the front seat controls. (For example, the radiostation selected with the front seat controls cannotbe changed by the rear seat control(s)).

277

The front seat audio controls always have priorityover the RSA controls. If the front seat passengersswitch to the same source as the RSA, the RSA willno longer control the source.

You can operate the RSA when the main radiois off.

You can use wired headphones (not included) orthe wireless headphones. The wired headphonesconnect to the outlets on the RSA system.The rear seat passengers have control of thevolume for each set of wired headphones. Adjustthe volume on the wireless headphones byturning the volume control on each headset.

Primary Radio ControlsThe following function is controlled by themain radio:

PWR (Power): Front seat passengers can turnthe RSA off by quickly pressing this knob twice.

Rear Seat Radio Controls

The following functions are controlled by the RSAsystem:

n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. The left knob controlsthe left wired headphones and the right knobcontrols the right wired headphones.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the systemon or off. The rear speakers will be muted when theRSA power is turned on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play acassette tape or CD when listening to the radio.The inactive tape or CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

278

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the nextpreset radio station. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press thisbutton to go to the other side of the tape.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, if multipleCDs are loaded. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to a CD.

©¨ (Seek): When listening to the radio, pressthe left or the right arrow to go to the next or theprevious station and stay there. This function isinactive if the front seat passengers are listening tothe radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press the left orthe right arrow to hear the next or the previousselection. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to go tothe start of the current track if more than eightseconds have played. Press the right arrow to go tothe next track on the CD. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(With Entertainment System)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the sources: radio and CDs.An audio or radio source may be listened to butcannot be changed from the RSE if the front seatpassengers have selected the same source fromthe front seat controls. (For example, the radiostation selected with the front seat controls cannotbe changed by the rear seat control(s).

The front seat audio controls always havepriority over the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch to the same source as the RSA,the RSA will no longer control the source.

You can operate the RSA when the main radiois off.

The rear seat passengers have control of thevolume for each set of headphones.

279

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSEsystem on and off. The rear speakers will bemuted when the RSA power is turned on.

1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the nextpreset radio station set on the pushbuttons onthe main radio. This function is not active ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press thisbutton to go to the other side of the tape. Thisfunction is not active if the front seat passengersare listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, if multipleCDs are loaded. This function is not active if thefront seat passengers are listening to a CD.


SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween playing a cassette tape and CD.

xSEEK w: When listening to the radio, pressthe up or the down arrow to go to the next or theprevious station and stay there. This function isinactive if the front seat passengers are listening tothe same band.

When a cassette tape is playing, press the up orthe down arrow to go to the next or the previousselection. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go tothe next track on the CD. Press the down arrow togo to the start of the current track if more thanfive seconds have played. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

280

x w (Volume): Press the up or down arrow toincrease or decrease the volume on the wiredheadphones (not included). The arrows onthe right are for the right headphones and thearrows on the left are for the left headphones.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discouragetheft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved toa different vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKEDdisplays.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio cannotoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Three Spoke)

If your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw: Press the up or the down arrow to go to thenext or to the previous radio station and stay there.The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the display andyou hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, playfor a few seconds, then go on to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

281

To scan the current CD, press and hold either up ordown arrow for more than two seconds. The CD willgo to the next track, play the first 10 seconds, thengo on to the next track. Press either up or downarrow again to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold eitherup or down arrow for more than four seconds. TheCD will go to the next CD, play the first 10 secondsof each track, then go on to the next CD. Presseither up or down arrow again to stop scanning.

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button toplay stations that are programmed on the radiopreset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek presetstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next available CD,if multiple CDs are loaded.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls(Four Spoke)

If your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Seek): Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous radio stationand stay there. The radio will only seek stationswith a strong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will goto a station, play for a few seconds, then go on tothe next station. Press either arrow again to stopscanning.

282

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

> (Mute): Press this button to silence thesystem. Press this button again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.


1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button toplay stations that are programmed on the radiopreset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek presetstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next available CD, ifmultiple CDs are loaded.

+ / − x (Volume): Pull the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interferenceand static during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other.For better radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

283

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or not at all. If thesurface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Fixed Mast Antenna (MAXX Only)The fixed mast antenna can withstand mostcar washes without being damaged. If the mastshould ever become slightly bent, straighten it outby hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the rear quarter panel.

284

Backglass Antenna (Sedan Only)The AM-FM antenna is integrated with therear window defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp objectto clear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damage causedto your backglass antenna due to metallictinting materials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Because this antenna is built into the rear window,there is a reduced risk of damage caused bycar washes and vandals.

If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, andthe antenna needs to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FMantenna are not damaged. There is enough spacebetween the grid lines to attach a cellular telephoneantenna without interfering with radio reception.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

285

✍ NOTES

286

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 288Defensive Driving ...................................... 288Drunken Driving ........................................ 289Control of a Vehicle .................................. 292Braking ...................................................... 292Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 293Braking in Emergencies ............................. 295Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 296Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 297Steering .................................................... 299Off-Road Recovery .................................... 302Passing ..................................................... 302Loss of Control .......................................... 304Competitive Driving ................................... 305Driving at Night ......................................... 306

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 307City Driving ............................................... 310Freeway Driving ........................................ 311Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 312Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 313Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 314Winter Driving ........................................... 316If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 320Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 321Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 322

Towing ........................................................ 328Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 328Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 328Towing a Trailer ........................................ 331

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

287

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

288

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

289

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

290

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

291

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 342.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 207.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

292

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

293

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

294

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing todo. Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do,the vehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding,ease off the brake pedal. This will help youretain steering control. If you do have ABS, it isdifferent. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 293.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

295

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of thefront wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift the transaxleto limit wheel spin. Also, the traction control systemactivates the appropriate corner brakes to gaineven quicker control to limit wheel spin.

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

It will come on when your Traction Control Systemis limiting wheel spin. You may feel or hear thesystem working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.

When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 176.

The Traction Control System operates in alltransaxle shift lever positions except park orneutral. But the system can upshift the transaxleonly as high as the shift lever position you’vechosen, so you should use the lower gears onlywhen necessary. See Automatic TransaxleOperation (Base Models) on page 127 orAutomatic Transaxle Operation (SS Models) onpage 130.

When the system is off,this warning light,located on theinstrument panel cluster,will come on to let youknow if there’s aproblem, or if the systemhas been turned off.

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

296

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TractionControl System on. But you can turn the system offif you prefer.

To turn the system on or off, press the TC buttonlocated under the climate controls. In order toeffectively “rock” the vehicle, you will need to turnoff TCS.

If you press the TC button once, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the traction control systemwarning light will come on. Press the TC buttonagain to turn the system back on. The tractioncontrol system warning light will go off.

When you turn the system off, the Traction ControlSystem warning light will come on and stay on.If the Traction Control System is limiting wheel spinwhen you press the button to turn the systemoff, the warning light will come on – but the systemwon’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’sno longer a current need to limit wheel spin.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 342 for more information.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions.The system operates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem reduces engine power and may alsoupshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.

This light will come onwhen your EnhancedTraction System isengaged and limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theEnhanced Traction System begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow youto safely use it again, you may re-engage thecruise control. See Cruise Control on page 176.

297

The Enhanced Traction System operates in alltransaxle shift lever positions. But the system canupshift the transaxle only as high as the shiftlever position you’ve chosen, so you should usethe lower gears only when necessary.

When the system is on,this warning light willcome on to let you knowthere’s a problem.

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the EnhancedTraction System on. But you can turn the systemoff if you prefer.

To turn the system onor off, press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the center consoleunder the climatecontrol system.

When you turn the system off, the EnhancedTraction System warning light will come on andstay on. If the Enhanced Traction System islimiting wheel spin when you press the button toturn the system off, the warning light will comeon – but the system won’t turn off right away.It will wait until there’s no longer a current need tolimit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The traction controlsystem warning light should go off.

298

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf your vehicle has the electric power steeringsystem and the engine stalls while you are driving,the power steering assist system will continue tooperate until you are able to stop your vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because theelectric power steering system is not functioning,you can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, contact your dealer forservice repairs. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 222.

Hydraulic Power SteeringIf your vehicle has the hydraulic power steeringsystem and you lose power steering assistbecause the engine stops or the power steeringsystem is not functioning, you can steer, but it willtake much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics whendriving on curves. The traction of the tires againstthe road surface makes it possible for thevehicle to change its path when you turn the frontwheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keepthe vehicle going in the same direction. If you haveever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

299

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm those placeswhere the tires meet the road and make you losecontrol. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 296 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 297.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


300

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lockyour wheels.

See Braking on page 292. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

301

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

302

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

303

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid arebest handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

304

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the brakingskid. If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to get thewheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using your vehiclefor competitive driving. After reviewing yourwarranty book, please see the GM PerformanceParts website or catalog for parts and equipmentrequired for competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitivedriving, the engine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oil levels candamage the engine. Be sure to check the oillevel often during competitive driving and keepthe level at or near the upper mark thatshows the proper operating range on theengine oil dipstick. For information on how toadd oil, see Engine Oil on page 357.

305

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

306

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

307

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

308

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 398.

309

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety incity driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 311.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a lightturns green, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

310

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

311

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

312

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

313

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

314

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gearpossible.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

315

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 398.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece ofold carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to helpprovide traction. Be sure you properly secure theseitems in your vehicle.

316

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently,too. If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 293. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS ornot, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS, ifyou feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

317

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through the snow.Here are some things to do to summon helpand keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

318

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot seeit or smell it, so you might not know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking your exhaust pipe. Andcheck around again from time to time to besure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

319

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

If your vehicle has a traction system, the tractionsystem can often help to free a stuck vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 296or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 297.If the stuck condition is too severe for thetraction system to free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rocking method.

320

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting the transaxleback and forth, you can destroy the transaxle.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 321.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 417.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has a traction system, youshould turn the traction system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 296 or EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 297. Thenshift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 328.

321

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).

Label Example

322

The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 398 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 407.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX pounds” on yourvehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

323

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 331 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

Item Description Total

AVehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

324



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

325

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label, found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door, tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

326

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk or rear area ofyour vehicle. In a trunk, put them asfar forward as you can. Try to spreadthe weight evenly. If you havefold-down rear seats, you will findfour anchors on the back wall of yourtrunk. You can use these anchors totie down lighter loads. They are notstrong enough for heavy things,however, so put them as far forwardas you can in the trunk or rear area.



• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

327

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 484.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicle can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 312.

328

Dinghy TowingThe Malibu Sedan SS and Maxx SS cannot bedinghy towed.

For vehicles that can be dinghy towed, followthese steps:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent your battery from draining while thevehicle is being towed, remove the followingfuse from the instrument panel fuse block: IGNSENSOR. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 447 for more information.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC.

6. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to install the fuses once you reachyour destination. To reinstall a fuse, do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Reinstall the fuse.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

329

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly TowingTo tow your vehicle with a dolly and two wheelson the ground, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

330

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

If you have a Malibu Sedan SS or a Maxx SS,trailer towing is not recommended. Your vehiclewas neither designed nor intended to tow a trailer.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped witha 3.5L V6 engine and the proper trailer towingequipment. To identify the trailering capacityof your vehicle, you should read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in thissection. Trailering is different than just driving yourvehicle by itself. Trailering means changes inhandling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering takes correct equipment, and ithas to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

331

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle isdriven. Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

332

When towing a trailer on long uphill grades whilethe outside temperature is above 85°F (29°C),reduce your vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) toavoid overheating the engine cooling system.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at:

Chevrolet Customer AssistanceP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying

that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 322 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

333

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322. Then be sureyou don’t go over the GVW limit for yourvehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If youdon’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 138. Dirtand water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes?

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly. And because you mayhave anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,both systems won’t work well, or at all.

334

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform (and attachments), safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

335

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle mayneed additional wiring. Check with your dealer.The arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesWhen towing a trailer on long uphill grades whilethe outside temperature is above 85°F (29°C),reduce your vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) toavoid overheating the engine cooling system.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before youstart down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If theindicator is in the red area, turn off the airconditioning to reduce engine load. See EngineOverheating on page 370.

336

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

337

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. Things that are especiallyimportant in trailer operation are automatictransaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, drive belt,cooling system and brake system. Each ofthese is covered in this manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,it’s a good idea to review this information beforeyou start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 370.

338

Service ........................................................ 342Accessories and Modifications ................... 342California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 343Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 343Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 344Fuel ............................................................. 344

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 344Gasoline Specifications .............................. 345California Fuel ........................................... 345Additives ................................................... 345Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 346Filling the Tank ......................................... 347Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 349

Checking Things Underthe Hood .................................................. 350Hood Release ........................................... 350Engine Compartment Overview .................. 352Engine Oil ................................................. 357Engine Oil Life System .............................. 360Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 362

Automatic Transaxle Fluid (2.2L L4and 3.5L V6 Engines) ............................ 363

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.9L V6 Engine) .................................... 364

Engine Coolant .......................................... 367Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 370Engine Overheating ................................... 370Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode (3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines) .... 372Cooling System ......................................... 373Power Steering Fluid ................................. 378Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 380Brakes ...................................................... 381Battery ...................................................... 384Jump Starting ............................................ 384

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 390Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 390Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ....................................... 390Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 392License Plate Lamp ................................... 394Replacement Bulbs ................................... 394

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

339

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 395Tires ............................................................ 398

Winter Tires .............................................. 399Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 400Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 404Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 407High-Speed Operation ............................... 408Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 409When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 410Buying New Tires ...................................... 411Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 413Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 414Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 415Wheel Replacement .................................. 415Tire Chains ............................................... 417If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 418Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 418Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 420Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 422Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and

Tools (Sedan) ........................................ 428

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Sedan SS) .................................. 430

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (All MAXX Models) ....................... 432

Compact Spare Tire .................................. 435Appearance Care ........................................ 436

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 436Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 437Leather ...................................................... 438Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 439Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 439Care of Safety Belts .................................. 440Weatherstrips ............................................ 440Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 440Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 441Finish Care ............................................... 441Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 441Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 442Tires ......................................................... 443Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 443Finish Damage .......................................... 443


340

Underbody Maintenance ............................ 443Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 444

Vehicle Identification .................................. 445Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 445Service Parts Identification Label ............... 446

Electrical System ........................................ 446Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 446Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 446

Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 446Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 447Fuses ........................................................ 447Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 447Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 450Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................. 452

Capacities and Specifications .................... 455


341

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicleall GM. Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

342

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 497.

343

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 90.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 473.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

344

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 345 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 212. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

345

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

346

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.To open the door, insert your finger into the fingerdepression next to the fuel door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

347

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 440.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 212.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 222 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 212.

348

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.



To help avoid injury to you and others:• Dispense gasoline only into approved

containers.• Do not fill a container while it is inside

a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

349

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedinside the vehicle tothe left of thesteering column.

350

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pushthe secondary hood release handle towardthe driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainerand put the hood prop into the slot markedwith an arrow.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hood and return theprop to its retainer. Lower the hood 8 to 12 inches(20 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and release it tolatch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closedand repeat the procedure if necessary.

351

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, here is what you will see:

352

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 362.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 357.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 357.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 373.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 381.

F. Battery. See Battery on page 384.G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 450.H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

353

When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

354


B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).See Power Steering Fluid on page 378

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 357.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 357.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 373.

F. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap. SeeCoolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 370

G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 381.

H. Battery. See Battery on page 384.I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 450.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

355

When you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

356


B. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See CoolingSystem on page 373

C. Power Steering Fluid. See Power SteeringFluid on page 378.

D. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid (2.2L L4 and 3.5LV6 Engines) on page 363 or AutomaticTransaxle Fluid (3.9L V6 Engine) on page 364.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to AddEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 357.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 357.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 373.

H. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap. SeeCoolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 370

I. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 381.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 384.

K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 450.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 352for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

357

When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engineor below the cross-hatched area at the tip ofthe dipstick for the V6 engine, you will need to addat least one quart/liter of oil. But you must usethe right kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 455.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 352 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

L4 Engine

V6 Engine

358

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

359

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M andhave the starburst symbol on the front of the oilcontainer.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter. Thisis based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil change willbe indicated can vary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, you must reset the systemevery time the oil is changed.When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 222. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.It is also important to check the oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

360

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, reset the system byperforming the following steps:

1. Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for at leastone second. An ACKNOWLEDGED displaymessage will appear for three seconds or untilthe next button is pressed. This will tell youthe system has been reset.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

361

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 352for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 460 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Remove the screws that hold the cover on.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thecover and reconnect the electrical connector.

362

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damageit. Always have the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(2.2L L4 and 3.5L V6 Engines)It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 463, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 469.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 469.

363

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.9L V6 Engine)When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 463, and besure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 469.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

364

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle has thissymbol on it, and islocated near the rear ofthe enginecompartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 352for more information on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

365

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 469.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 469.

366

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.The following explains the cooling system and howto add coolant when it is low. If there is a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheatingon page 370.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:• Give freezing protection down to

−34°F (−37°C).• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).• Protect against rust and corrosion.• Help keep the proper engine temperature.• Let the warning lights and gages work as they

should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at thefirst maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

367

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will.Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you would notget the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged. The repair cost would not be coveredby your warranty. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check the cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only the propermixture of the engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 469 for more information.

368

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rearof the engine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 352 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When theengine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.

369

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool. If the surge tankis empty, a special fill procedure is necessary.See Engine Overheating on page 370 and CoolingSystem on page 373.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gageas well as an engine coolant temperaturewarning light on your vehicle’s instrument panelcluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 212 and Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 211.

370

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

371

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode (3.5L V6 and3.9L V6 Engines)This emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The temperature gage willindicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 357.

372

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Engine Coolant Surge TankC. Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.2L L4 and 3.9L V6 Enginessimilar

373

The coolant level should be at or above the FULLCOLD mark on the front of the coolant surge tank. Ifit is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap orin the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump, or somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do not touchthem. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

374

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at or above theFULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem, including the coolant surge tank pressurecap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 367 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, andifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

375

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

376

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure cap whenthe cooling system,including the coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allowany pressure still left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

377

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with theproper mixture, to the FULL COLD mark onthe front of the surge tank. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see if the level isbelow the FULL COLD mark. If the levelis below the FULL COLD mark, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the FULL COLD mark for atleast five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lowerthan the FULL COLD mark, add more of theproper mixture to the coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches the FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

See your dealer, if necessary.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 352 forreservoir location.

378

When to Check Power Steering FluidPower steering fluid is used in all vehicles withV6 engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder enginehave electric power steering and do not use powersteering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless a leak is suspected in thesystem, or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid lossin this system could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick

The fluid level should be within the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the ADD mark on thedipstick, add just enough fluid to bring thelevel within the crosshatched area.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 469.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

379

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a LOW WASHER FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 222for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 352for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

380

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 352 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 207.

381

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 469.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 440.

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and may haverear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

382

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.If you have rear drum brakes, they do not havewear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brakerubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspectedimmediately.

Also, the rear brake drums should be removed andinspected each time the tires are removed forrotation or changing. When you have the frontbrake pads replaced, have the rear brakesinspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts.

383

If you do not, your brakes may no longer workproperly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. Whenit is time for a new battery, get one that has thereplacement number shown on the original battery’slabel. We recommend an ACDelco® replacementbattery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 352 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 384 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use thefollowing steps to do it safely.

384

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Put anautomatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manualtransaxle in NEUTRAL before setting theparking brake.

385

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug

unnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.Turn off the radio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Findthe positive (+) and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 352 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water. Youdo not need to add water to the batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

386

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles could bedamaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And do notconnect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.

387

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.If the security light flashes, wait until the lightstops flashing.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

388

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

389

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 394.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, andParking Lamps

A. High-Beam HeadlampB. Low-Beam Headlamp/DRLC. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

390

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 350 for more information.

2. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlampassembly to the vehicle.

3. Remove the headlamp assembly from thevehicle by pulling it forward. Use care notto scratch the vehicle with the lamp orthe lamp with the fender.

4. Remove the dust covers (A, B, or C) from theindividual bulb sockets.

5. Disconnect thewiring harness,then turn thebulb socketcounterclockwiseto remove it.

391

6. Remove the bulbfrom the bulbsocket.

7. Replace the old bulb with a new bulb.

8. Turn the bulb socket clockwise and reconnectthe wiring harness to the bulb socket.

9. Return the headlamp assembly to its originalposition. Be sure to line up the holes in thelamp assembly to the round ends of themounting pins.

10. Reinstall the two bolts attaching the headlampassembly to the vehicle.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

To replace one of thesebulbs, do the following:

A. TaillampB. Back-Up LampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk (Sedan)on page 112 or Liftgate (MAXX) on page 113for more information.

392

2. Remove thetwo fastenerslocated on theinside of the trunkat the rear ofthe vehicle.

3. Pull back the trunk trim.

4. Remove the plastic wing nut.

5. Pull out the taillamp assembly and turn thebulb socket one quarter turn counterclockwise.

6. Pull the bulb toremove it from thesocket. Replacethe old bulb with anew one.

7. Reverse the steps to attach the taillampassembly to the vehicle.When securing the lamp assembly back intoplace, align the assembly so that the trunklid doesn’t contact it.

393

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelamp assembly.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamp 921Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3157KXLicense Plate Lamp *W5W, **168Headlamps

High-Beam H9Low-Beam/DRL H11

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn SignalLamp 3057

* Malibu SS**Malibu MAXX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

394

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 460.

To replace the wiper blade, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the tab that holds the wiper blade tothe arm.

3. Pull the assembly down to release it from theU-hooked end of the wiper arm and slide theassembly away from the arm.

4. Slide in the new wiper blade assembly andsnap it into place.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the other wiper,if necessary.

395

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement – MAXXTo replace the rear wiper blade, do the following:

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away fromthe window.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper bladeassembly, as shown.

3. Hold the wiper blade refill with the curved sidefacing downward.

396

4. Remove clip (A), shown in step 3, and slide itinto the claw of the wiper blade assembly.

5. Remove clip (B), shown in step 3, and slide itinto the remaining claw of the wiper bladeassembly.

397

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 322.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause serious



injury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 407.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 408 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

398

Low-Profile Performance TireIf your vehicle has P225/50R18 or P225/50R17size tires, they are classified as low-profileperformance tires. These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.You may also notice more road noise withlow-profile performance tires and that they tend towear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GMwarranty does not cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressureand, when possible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice coveredroads often, you may want to get winter tires foryour vehicle. All season tires provide good overallperformance on most surfaces but they maynot offer the traction you would like or the samelevel of performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreased dryroad traction, increased road noise, and shortertread life. After switching to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also,see Buying New Tires on page 411.

399

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’swidth, height, aspect ratio, construction type, andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

400

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 414.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

401

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 435 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 418.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 407.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Compact Spare Tire Example

402

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

403

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 407.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322.

404

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 322.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 407 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322.

405

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 410.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 414.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322.

406

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 435.

407

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additionalstrain on tires. Sustained high-speeddriving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. Youcould have a crash and you or otherscould be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such that avehicle can be driven at high speeds,make sure the tires are rated for highspeed operation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

Set the cold tire inflation pressure to35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and rear tires, whenoperating your vehicle at high-speed conditions.

408

When you end high-speed driving return the tiresto the cold inflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 407.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 410and Wheel Replacement on page 415 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 460.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

409

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 455.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 418.

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

410

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

411

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 400 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,



brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 435.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

412

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, ifyour vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronicstability control, the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 411 andAccessories and Modifications on page 342 foradditional information.

413

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

414

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

415

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 418 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

416

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P215/60R16,P225/50R17, or P225/50R18 size tires, donot use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow that



manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has P205/65R15 sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class S-typechains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

417

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to usethe jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 170 for moreinformation.

418

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

419

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is in the trunk orcargo area.

1. Open the trunk for sedan models. See Trunk(Sedan) on page 112 for more information.For MAXX models, open the liftgate. SeeLiftgate (MAXX) on page 113.

2. For the sedan, lift the handle on the spare tirecover. The handle may hook on the trunkfront edge weatherstrip to hold the cover outof the way. For the MAXX, lift the handleto release the latch on the spare tire cover.

3. For the MAXX, lift and remove the cover. 4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the compactspare tire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 435 for more information.

5. Remove the wing nut holding the jackin place.

6. Remove the extension bolt (MAXX modelsand Sedan SS only) that is clipped to thejack. You will need this later to store theflat tire.

7. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from thetrunk or cargo area.

420

Tire Changing Tools

The tools you will be using include the wheelwrench (A) and jack (B). The MAXX and allSS models include an additional extension.

1. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise toloosen wheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.Sedan shown, MAXX Models and Sedan SS similar

421

3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench bypressing the button with your index finger andpulling on the end of the wrench. You must dothis before using the wheel wrench.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap

that has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen theplastic nut caps. You might need to usethe wheel wrench to loosen them. Do not pryoff wheel covers or center caps that haveplastic wheel nut caps.

2. Remove the wheel cover or center cap fromthe wheel to locate the wheel nuts.If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapwithout plastic wheel nut caps, gently pryon the edge of the plastic wheel trim to removeit from the wheel to locate the wheel nuts.

422

3. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.Do not remove them yet.

4. It is recommended that you do a safety checkbefore preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 418 for more information.

5. Position the lift head at the jack locationnearest the flat tire. Make sure all of thejack lift head is touching the jacking flangeunder the body. Do not place the jack under abody panel. The lower body panel has anarrow to aid in locating the jacking location.

423

6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tirebeing changed.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough room for thecompact spare tire to fit.

424

8. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,



remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

10. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces andspare wheel.

425

11. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend toward the wheel. Tighten each nut byhand or with the wrench until the wheel is heldagainst the hub. 13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

426

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 455for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 455 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

14. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown, withthe wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverand wheel nut caps in the trunk until you have theflat tire repaired or replaced.

427

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Sedan)

Storing a Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the flat tire and tools in the compactspare tire compartment, do the following:

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. Jack and Wheel

Wrench

D. Flat Tire (ValveStem down)

E. Bolt

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk (Sedan) onpage 112 for more information.

2. Remove the center cap from the wheel.

3. Place the tire (D) in the compartment, valvestem up, with the bolt (E) extending throughthe wheel center hole.

428

4. Place the jack and wheel wrench (D) over thebolt (E), inside the wheel.

5. Secure by tightening the larger wing nut (B)onto the bolt (E).

6. Reinstall the tire cover (A).

Storing the Compact Spare TireThe compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Store the compact spare tire and tools asshown in the following diagram.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing Nut

E. Jack and WheelWrench

F. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 435.

429

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Sedan SS)

{CAUTION:


Storing the Flat Tire and ToolsTo store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk (Sedan) onpage 112 for more information.

2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

3. Place the jack over the bolt (B) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown.

4. With the yellow cap in place to prevent thewheel from being scratched, place the boltextension (A) onto the bolt (B).

5. Thread the small wing nut (C) until it is at ornear the end of the threads.

6. Place the flat tire in the compartment, valvestem up.

430

7. Reach under the wheel and lift the boltextension (A) so that the threaded end of thebolt passes through the center hole of thewheel.

8. Remove the yellow cap.

9. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer.

10. Re-install the cover.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Flat TireD. Wing Nut

E. Bolt ExtensionF. Jack and Wheel

WrenchG. Bolt

431

Storing the Compact Spare TireThe compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Store the compact spare tire and tools asshown in the following diagram.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Flat TireD. Wing Nut

E. Jack, WheelWrench and BoltExtension

F. Bolt


Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (All MAXX Models)

{CAUTION:


432

Storing the Flat Tire and ToolsTo store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate (MAXX) onpage 113 for more information.

2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

3. Place the jack over the bolt (B) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown.

4. Install the bracket (D) and then the boltextension (A).

5. Secure the jack, bracket and bolt extensionwith the wing nut (C) provided.

6. With the valve stem up, place the tire on thecompartment floor with the rear of the tirebeneath the trim panel (tire may not laycompletely flat).

7. Make sure the bolt extension (A) passesthrough the wheel center.

8. Remove the plug from the center hole of thefloor cover by pressing on the tabs on thebottom of the cover.

9. Remove the yellow cap from the boltextension.

10. Fold the rear flap of the cover up and place thecover on top of the wheel. The extension willcome through the center hole in the cover.

11. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer.

433

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Flat Tire (Valve

Stem Up)D. Nut

E. Bolt ExtensionF. BracketG. Jack and Wheel

WrenchH. Bolt

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand ToolsThe compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Store the compact spare tire and tools asshown in the following diagram.

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing NutE. Bracket

F. Jack, WheelWrench and BoltExtension

G. Bolt

434


Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

435

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

436

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

437

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

438

Ultra Lux Suede

Cleaning Ultra Lux SuedeUse a mild solution of lukewarm water and aneutral dish soap on a soft cloth or sponge. Forthe following stains, follow these instructions:

Coffee, Tea, and Milk: Blot with a clean,soft, white cloth. Then clean with mild soapy waterand a clean white cloth.

Cosmetics: Clean with mild soapy water and aclean white cloth.

Jelly, Syrup, and Fruit: Remove most of thesolids, then clean with warm tap water and a cleanwhite cloth.

Oil and Grease: Sprinkle baking soda on thespot, brush, then wipe with a clean white cloth.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

439

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 469.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 444. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

440

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 440.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 444.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

441

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

442

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

443

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches and otherlight surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

444

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andsuede upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, suede andcarpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

445

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 90.

See Towing a Trailer on page 331 for moreinformation about add-on electrical equipment andtowing a vehicle.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one foreach headlamp, in the fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the lamps to turn off. If thishappens, have your headlamp wiring checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

446

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsThe power window motors are protected by a circuitbreaker in the motor, and a fuse in the fuse panel. Ifthe motor overheats due to a heavy load thewindow will stop until the motor cools. When thecurrent load is too heavy the fuse will open,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by fuses and fusible thermallinks in the wiring itself.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’thave a spare fuse, you can borrow one thathas the same amperage. Just pick a feature ofyour vehicle that you can get along without — likethe radio or cigarette lighter — and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it assoon as you can.

There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one inthe center of the instrument panel, one in theengine compartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located on the instrumentpanel fuse block. It can be used to easily removefuses from the fuse block.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located at onthe lower front side of the console, on thepassenger side of the vehicle. To access thefuses, open the fuse panel door by pulling out.

To reinstall the door, insert the hooks at the frontend first, then push the door into the consolepanel to secure it.

447

Fuses UsagePOWERMIRRORS Power Mirrors

EPS Electric Power Steering

Fuses Usage

RUN/CRANKCruise Control, Electronic RangeSelect, Driver Shift Control,Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

448

Fuses UsageHVACBLOWER HIGH(Relay)

Climate Control System

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument Panel Cluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAR OnStar® SystemNOTINSTALLED Not Used

AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag SystemHVACCTRL (BATT) Climate Control System

PEDAL Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalWIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer SwitchIGN SENSOR Ignition SwitchSTR/WHLILLUM

Steering Wheel ControlsBacklighting

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

RADIO Audio SystemINTERIORLIGHTS

Overhead Lighting, Trunk/CargoLighting

REAR WIPER Rear Wiper System/Washer PumpHVACCTRL (IGN) Climate Control System

Fuses UsageHVACBLOWER Climate Control System

DOOR LOCK Automatic Door Lock System

ROOF/HEATSEAT

Sunroof, Heated Seats, AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror, Compass,Rear Wiper/Washer System

POWERWINDOWS Power Window Switch



AIRBAG(BATT) Airbag System

FUSE PULLER Fuse PullerSPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare

SPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare



449

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 352 for more information on location.

450

Fuses Usage1 Air Conditioning Clutch2 Electronic Throttle Control3 Engine Control Module (IGN 1) (V6)4 Transmission6 Emission 17 Left Headlamp Low-Beam8 Horn9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps11 Left Headlamp High-Beam12 Right Headlamp High-Beam13 Engine Control Module (BATT) (L4)14 Windshield Wiper15 Anti-lock Brake System16 Engine Control Module (IGN 1) (L4)17 Cooling Fan 118 Cooling Fan 219 Run Relay20 IBCM 121 IBCM (R/C)

Fuses Usage22 Rear Electrical Center 123 Rear Electrical Center 224 Anti-lock Brake System25 IBCM 226 Starter

27 (DIODE) Windshield Wiper41 Electric Power Steering42 Transaxle Control Module43 Ignition Module44 Fuel Injectors45 Rear Oxygen Sensors

46 (Resistor) Brake Lamp Diagnostic47 Daytime Running Lamps51 Engine Control Module (BATT) (V6)

451

Relays Usage28 Cooling Fan 129 Cooling Fan Mode Series/Parallel30 Cooling Fan 231 Starter32 Run/Crank Ignition33 Powertrain34 Air Conditioning Clutch35 High-Beam Headlamps36 Front Fog Lamps37 Horn38 Low-Beam Headlamps39 Windshield Wiper 140 Windshield Wiper 248 Daytime Running Lamps

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The rear compartment fuse block is located in thetrunk of the vehicle. Access the fuse blockthrough the trunk panel on the driver’s side of therear cargo area.

452

Fuses Usage1 Not Used2 Driver Seat Controls3 Not Used

Fuses Usage4 Not Used5 Emission6 Parklamps

453

Fuses Usage7 Not Used8 Not Used9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls11 Not Used12 Auxiliary Power 213 Not Used14 Heated Seat Controls15 Not Used

16Remote Keyless Entry System, XMSatellite Radio, Rear SeatEntertainment System, Homelink

17 Back-up Lamps18 Not Used19 Not Used

20 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

21 Not Used22 Trunk

Fuses Usage23 Rear Window Defogger24 Heated Mirror Controls25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage26 Rear Window Defogger27 Parklamps28 Not Used29 Not Used30 Not Used31 Not Used32 Not Used33 Back-up Lamps34 Not Used35 Not Used36 Trunk37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Trunk, Cargo Lamps

454

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer toRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 469 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transaxle Complete Overhaul

Automatic Transaxle 4T45-E 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Automatic Transaxle 4T65-E 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Cooling System

2.2L L4 Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L

3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 9.9 qt 9.4 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.2L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L

3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 4.0 qt 3.8 L

455

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

Sedan 16.1 gal 61.1 L

Malibu Maxx 16.3 gal 61.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.2L L4 F Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.5L V6 N Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.9L V6 1 Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

456

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 458Introduction ............................................... 458Maintenance Requirements ........................ 458Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 458Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 459Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 460Additional Required Services ..................... 463Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 464Owner Checks and Services ..................... 465

At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 466At Least Once a Month ............................. 466At Least Once a Year ............................... 467Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 469Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ................................. 470Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 471Maintenance Record .................................. 473

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

457

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance may not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

458

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements. Soplease read the following and note how youdrive. If you have any questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer.This schedule is for vehicles that:• carry passengers and cargo within

recommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 344.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 460 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 463 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 464 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

459

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 497.

Owner Checks and Services on page 465 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 469 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 470.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it meansthat service is required for your vehicle. Have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the engine oil lifesystem may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer has GM-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 360 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

460

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your first servicebe Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if themessage comes on within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 357. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 360. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 362. See footnote (k). •

461

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 409 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 466.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

3.9L Engine Only: Check automatic transaxle fluid level and add fluid asneeded. •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

462

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 362. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluidand filter (severe service only). Seefootnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plugwires (V6 only). An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (l).

•

463

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect electric powersteering cables for proper hook-up, binding,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect hydraulic powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace blades that appear worn ordamaged or that streak or miss areas of thewindshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lidhinges and latches. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

464

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 367 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 469.

465

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 357 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 367 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 407. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 418.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 409.

466

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 134.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 134.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

467

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and property could bedamaged. Make sure there is room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

468

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 357.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 367.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic

Power SteeringSystem (ifequipped)

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, inCanada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease (GM Part No.U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

469

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Part Part Numbers ACDelco® PartNumbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25099149 A1208 CEngine Oil Filter

2.2L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G3.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 89017342 PF61

Spark Plugs2.2L L4 Engine 12598004 41-1033.5L V6 and 3.9L V6 Engines 12591131 41-100

Windshield Wiper BladesDriver’s Side – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 22688087 —Passenger’s Side – 19.6 inches (50.0 cm) 22688086 —Rear – 18 inches (46.7 cm) 10392621* —

*Wiper blade and assembly

470

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.2L L4 Engine

3.5L V6 Engine

471

3.9L V6 MAXX Engine

472

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 458. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 465 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

473

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



474




475




476

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 478Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 478Online Owner Center ................................. 481Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 482Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 482GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 483Roadside Assistance Program ................... 484Courtesy Transportation ............................. 487Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 490Collision Damage Repair ........................... 491

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 496Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 496Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 496Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 496Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 497

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

477

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

This is available from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

478

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBB AutoLine Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

479

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

480

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

481

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

482

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

483

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in Canada).Service to provide diesel may be restricted. Forsafety reasons, propane and other alternativefuels will not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

484

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

485

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:• Your name, home address, and home

telephone number.• Telephone number of your location.• Location of the vehicle.• Model, year, color, and license plate number.• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

486

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program fornew vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

487

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warrantyrepairs, and public transportation is used as‘shuttle service,’ the reimbursement is limitedto the associated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

488

In addition, for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through a friend or relative,limited reimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supported by originalreceipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

489

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if thevehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), toprovide anti-lock braking and to help the drivercontrol the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored onlyin a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,

such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

490

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

491

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

492

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 484 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

493

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

494

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

495

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

496

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

497

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

498

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 342Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 187Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-

Equipped Vehicle ....................................... 91Additives, Fuel ............................................ 345Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 446Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 124Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 362Air Conditioning .................................. 189, 193Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 205Readiness Light ....................................... 204

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 490

Airbag System ............................................... 74Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 91How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 81Passenger Sensing System ....................... 84Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 90What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 81What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 82When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 80Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 76

Airbag System (cont.)Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 285Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 284Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ....................................... 285Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 293Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 208Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 442Care of Safety Belts ................................ 440Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 444Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 441Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 436Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 437Finish Care .............................................. 441Finish Damage ......................................... 443Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 439Leather .................................................... 438Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 443Tires ........................................................ 443Ultra Lux Suede ....................................... 439Underbody Maintenance ........................... 443Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 444Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 440Weatherstrips ........................................... 440Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 441

499

Appearance Care (cont.)Audio System(s) .......................................... 227

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ........ 281, 282Backglass Antenna ................................... 285Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 284Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 284Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 284Radio with CD ................................ 229, 235Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 244Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................... 277, 279Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 229Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 228Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 281Understanding Radio Reception ............... 283XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 285

Automatic Climate Control System ............... 193Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 184Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ............................................... 363, 364Operation ........................................ 127, 130

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 285Battery ........................................................ 384

Run-Down Protection ............................... 187Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 312Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 293Emergencies ............................................ 295Parking .................................................... 134System Warning Light .............................. 207

Brake Pedal, Throttle ................................... 124Brakes ........................................................ 381Braking ....................................................... 292Braking in Emergencies ............................... 295Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 120Bulb Replacement ....................................... 390

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 390Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

and Parking Lamps .............................. 390License Plate Lamps ................................ 394Replacement Bulbs .................................. 394Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps .............................. 392Buying New Tires ........................................ 411

500

CCalibration .......................................... 140, 142California Fuel ............................................. 345California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 343Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 455Carbon Monoxide ..... 112, 113, 138, 316, 331Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 440Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 284Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 284

Cargo Lamp ................................................ 186Center Console Storage Area ...................... 160Chains, Tire ................................................. 417Charging System Light ................................ 207Check

Engine Light ............................................ 212Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 350Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 444Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 51Infants and Young Children ........................ 47Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 58Older Children ........................................... 44Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 67

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 69Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 55

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 188Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 442Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 441Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 437Finish Care .............................................. 441Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 436Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 439Leather .................................................... 438Tires ........................................................ 443Ultra Lux Suede ....................................... 439Underbody Maintenance ........................... 443Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 440Weatherstrips ........................................... 440Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 441

Climate Control System ............................... 189Automatic ................................................. 193Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 199

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 491Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 435Compass ............................................ 140, 142

501

Competitive Driving ..................................... 305Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 116Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 292Convenience Net ......................................... 162Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 212Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 211Heater, Engine ......................................... 125Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 370

Cooling System ........................................... 373Cruise Control ............................................. 176Cruise Control Light .................................... 217Cupholder(s) ................................................ 160Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 487Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 482Customer Assistance Offices .................... 482Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 478GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 483Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 496Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 496Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 496

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Roadside Assistance Program .................. 484Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 497

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 183Defensive Driving ........................................ 288Delayed Headlamps .................................... 182Delayed Locking .......................................... 108Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 343Dome Lamp ................................................ 185Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 108Door Ajar Reminder ................................. 108Locks ....................................................... 107Power Door Locks ................................... 108Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 110Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 110

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 219DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 219DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 225DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 222

502

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 306City .......................................................... 310Defensive ................................................. 288Drunken ................................................... 289Freeway ................................................... 311Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 314In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 307Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 321Winter ...................................................... 316

DVDRear Seat Entertainment System ............. 260

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 446Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 450Fuses ...................................................... 447Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 446Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 447Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 447Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 452Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 446

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 362Battery ..................................................... 384Check and Service Engine Soon Light ........ 212Coolant .................................................... 367Coolant Heater ......................................... 125Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 212Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 211Drive Belt Routing .................................... 471Engine Compartment Overview ................ 352Exhaust ................................................... 138Oil ........................................................... 357Oil Life System ........................................ 360Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 372Overheating ............................................. 370Starting .................................................... 123

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 297Active Light .............................................. 211Warning Light ........................................... 210

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 186Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 490Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 43Exterior Lamps ............................................ 179

503

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 362Finish Damage ............................................ 443Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 284Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 170Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 173Flat Tire ...................................................... 418Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 418Flat Tire, Storing ........................ 428, 430, 432Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ........................ 363, 364Power Steering ........................................ 378Windshield Washer .................................. 380

Fog Lamps .................................................. 185Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14Front Reading Lamps .................................. 186Fuel ............................................................ 344

Additives .................................................. 345California Fuel .......................................... 345Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 349Filling Your Tank ...................................... 347Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 346

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 218Gasoline Octane ...................................... 344Gasoline Specifications ............................ 345

Fuses .......................................................... 447Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 450Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 447Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 452Windshield Wiper ..................................... 446

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 212Fuel ......................................................... 218Speedometer ........................................... 202Tachometer .............................................. 202

Garage Door Opener .......................... 148, 149Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 344Specifications ........................................... 345

Glove Box ................................................... 159GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 483

504

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 170Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 446Headlamps

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 184Bulb Replacement .................................... 390Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 183Delayed ................................................... 182Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 173Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 390Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

and Parking Lamps .............................. 390High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 172On Reminder ........................................... 182

Headlamps Off in Park (P) .......................... 182Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ................................................ 189, 193Highbeam On Light ..................................... 217High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 408Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 313Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 314Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 350Release ................................................... 350

Horn ............................................................ 170How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 121Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 47Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 407Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 168Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 185Cluster ..................................................... 200

JJump Starting .............................................. 384

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 99Keys ............................................................. 97

505

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 400Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 187Cargo ...................................................... 186Dome ....................................................... 185Exterior .................................................... 179Fog .......................................................... 185Front Reading .......................................... 186Rear Reading .......................................... 186Trunk ....................................................... 186

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 58

License Plate Lamps ................................... 394Lift Seat, Power ............................................ 16Liftgate ........................................................ 113Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 204Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 208Brake System Warning ............................. 207Charging System ..................................... 207Cruise Control .......................................... 217Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 211Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light .......................................... 211Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 210

Light (cont.)Highbeam On .......................................... 217Malfunction Indicator ................................ 212Oil Pressure ............................................. 216Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 205Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 203Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 203Security ................................................... 217TCS Warning Light .................................. 209Traction Control System Active ................. 210Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 209

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................. 186Parade Dimming ...................................... 186

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 322Lockout Protection ....................................... 111Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 108Door ........................................................ 107Lockout Protection ................................... 111Power Door ............................................. 108Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 110Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 110

Loss of Control ........................................... 304Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

506

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 463At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 466At Least Once a Month ............................ 466At Least Once a Year .............................. 467Introduction .............................................. 458Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 464Maintenance Record ................................ 473Maintenance Requirements ...................... 458Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 470Owner Checks and Services .................... 465Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 469Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 460Using ....................................................... 459Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 458

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 212Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Seats .................................................. 8Map Pocket ................................................. 160Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 222Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearviewwith Compass ....................................... 142

Mirrors (cont.)Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® and Compass ......................... 140Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 140Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 140Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 144Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................. 144Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 144

MyGMLink.com ............................................ 481

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 120Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 470

OOdometer .................................................... 202Odometer, Trip ............................................ 202Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 302Oil

Engine ..................................................... 357Pressure Light .......................................... 216

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 360Older Children, Restraints ............................. 44Online Owner Center ................................... 481

507

OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 145Other Warning Devices ................................ 170Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 199Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 187Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 144Power Heated Mirrors .............................. 144Power Mirrors .......................................... 144

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 372

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 465Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 443Parade Dimming .......................................... 186Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 135Shifting Out of ......................................... 136

Park (P) Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............ 182Parking

Brake ....................................................... 134Over Things That Burn ............................ 137

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 205Passenger Sensing System ........................... 84Passing ....................................................... 302

PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 118PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 119Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 187Door Locks .............................................. 108Electrical System ..................................... 447Lift Seat ..................................................... 16Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 122Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 378Windows .................................................. 115

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 43Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 110

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 25

RRadios ........................................................ 227

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 284Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 284Radio with CD ................................ 229, 235Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 244Rear Seat Audio ............................. 277, 279

508

Radios (cont.)Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 229Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS) .................. 228Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 281Understanding Reception ......................... 283

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..... 160Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 110Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 186Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 277, 279Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 260Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 17Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 175Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with Compass .......................................... 142Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 140Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 140Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 140Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 469

Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 328Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 99Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................. 100Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 422Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 420Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 394Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 496General Motors ........................................ 496United States Government ....................... 496

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 92Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 93Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 122Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 484Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 321Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 471Running the Engine While Parked ............... 139

509

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 203Pretensioners ............................................. 43Reminder Light ........................................ 203

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 440Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 25Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 43Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 460Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14

SeatsHead Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14Power Lift Seat .......................................... 16Power Seat ................................................. 9Rear Seat Operation .................................. 17Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 67Right Front Seat Position ........................... 69

Security Light .............................................. 217Service ........................................................ 342

Accessories and Modifications .................. 342Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 344California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 343Doing Your Own Work ............................. 343Engine Soon Light ................................... 212Publications Ordering Information ............. 497

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 90

510

Setting the TimeRadios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 229Radios without Radio Data

Systems (RDS) ..................................... 228Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 443Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 135Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 136Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 172Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 435Installing .................................................. 422Removing ................................................ 420Storing ................................... 428, 430, 432

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 455Speedometer ............................................... 202Starting Your Engine ................................... 123Steering ...................................................... 299Steering Wheel Controls, Audio .......... 281, 282

Storage AreasCenter Console Storage Area ................... 160Convenience Net ..................................... 162Cupholder(s) ............................................ 160Glove Box ................................................ 159Map Pocket ............................................. 160Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover .... 160Table ....................................................... 162

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 320Sun Visors .................................................. 115Sunroof ....................................................... 162

TTable ........................................................... 162Tachometer ................................................. 202Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 392

TCS Active Light ......................................... 210TCS Warning Light ...................................... 209

511

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 281Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 116

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 116PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 118PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 119

Throttle, Adjustable ...................................... 124Tires ........................................................... 398

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 442Buying New Tires ..................................... 411Chains ..................................................... 417Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 418Cleaning .................................................. 443Compact Spare Tire ................................. 435Different Size ........................................... 413High-Speed Operation .............................. 408If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 418Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 407Inspection and Rotation ............................ 409Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 422Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 422Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 420

Tires (cont.)Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ..................... 428, 430, 432Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 400Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 404Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 414Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 415Wheel Replacement ................................. 415When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 410Winter Tires ............................................. 399

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 328Towing a Trailer ....................................... 331Your Vehicle ............................................. 328

TractionControl System Active Light ..................... 210Control System (TCS) .............................. 296Control System Warning Light .................. 209Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 297Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light .......................................... 211Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 210

512

TransaxleFluid, Automatic .............................. 363, 364

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ........... 127, 130Trip Odometer ............................................. 202Trunk .......................................................... 112Trunk Lamps ............................................... 186Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 172Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 171

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 283Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 414Universal Home Remote System ........ 148, 149

Operation ........................................ 150, 156

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 292Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 322Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 490

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 445Service Parts Identification Label .............. 446

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 225

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 199Visors .......................................................... 115

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 200Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 222Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 170Other Warning Devices ............................ 170Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 415Different Size ........................................... 413Replacement ............................................ 415

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 55

513

Windows ..................................................... 114Power ...................................................... 115

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 174Washer Fluid ........................................... 380Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 395Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 441Wiper Fuses ............................................ 446Wipers ..................................................... 173

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 175Winter Driving ............................................. 316Winter Tires ................................................. 399

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 258XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 285

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 458

514

Date post:	30-Mar-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	nguyenkien
View:	214 times
Download:	0 times

2007 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could...

Documents